Subido por carlos paul

pdfcoffee.com solucion-js-intermediate-teacher-s-book-apdf-pdf-free

Anuncio
Terry Prosser
with Jane Revell and Jeremy Harmer
intermediate
A
Teacher’s Guide
Letter to you, the teacher
Hello – and a big welcome to Jetstream Intermediate,
the course we’ve written to help your students learn
English (and improve what they already know). We’ve
used engaging and stimulating topics and activities so
that, we believe, students will study successfully and
enjoyably.
Our intention has been to blend the familiar (activities
and exercises with which teachers and students feel
comfortable) with some newer, different features which
are intended to add extra depth and interest to the
learning experience, for example:
• Jetstream is thought-provoking. It gets students to
think in a variety of different ways, not only about
ideas, but also about the language itself;
• Because we live in a connected digital society,
Jetstream often invites students to venture beyond
the Student’s Book itself (if they can) and bring
what they’ve found and enjoyed back to the
classroom;
• Jetstream presents a wide variety of people, cultural
settings and topics – because learning how to
communicate also means learning about the world
we all live in;
• Above all, Jetstream encourages students to use the
language they’re learning in a grown-up way that
fits with our increasingly interconnected world.
The thinking behind Jetstream
Underlying everything in Jetstream are a number of
principles that have guided us during the writing
process. We believe:
• that what students bring to the learning experience
(and the Student’s Book) is as important as what’s
between the covers. That’s why students are often
asked for their input, and to share (if they want)
their stories, thoughts, reactions and opinions;
• that providing a range of stimulating topics – and,
crucially, a repertoire of appropriately challenging
activities – is the key to successful student
involvement, and, therefore, learning;
• in providing students with a range of the most
appropriate and useful vocabulary at this level – and
offering them different ways of meeting, learning
and practising that vocabulary;
• that grammar is important (of course!) and that
students need to interact with it in enquiring and
creative ways;
•
in providing a range of stimulating and appropriate
practice and production activities which both
bolster students’ knowledge whilst at the same time
giving scope for creativity and experimentation.
The Teacher’s Guide
As teachers ourselves, we know how busy and
demanding a teacher’s life can be. That’s why Jetstream
comes with a Teacher’s Guide which can take you
through each lesson, step by step. There’s a wealth
of support online, too, including extra material and
practice tests. However – and this is important to stress
– you don’t have to use any of this if you don’t feel like
it. It’s there in case you want it and find it useful, that’s
all. But if you’re happy to ‘do your own thing’, that’s
wonderful too. We believe that Jetstream allows you
considerable flexibility if that’s what you’re after!
So this is Jetstream: a course designed to provide
students with a rich and rewarding learning experience;
a course which we believe is extremely enjoyable to
teach with.
Have a good time and good luck!
Jane Revell and Jeremy Harmer
Contents
Letter to you, the teacher
Jetstream Intermediate Student’s Book contents
Introduction
Jetstream Intermediate components
Jetstream approach – a summary
Unit overview
Unit notes
Introduction
Unit 1
Unit 2
Units 1&2 Review
Unit 3
Unit 4
Units 3&4 Review
Unit 5
Unit 6
Units 5&6 Review
Tasks
Teacher’s notes
Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
Unit 5
Unit 6
Technique banks
Using the video
Using memory games
Working with mixed-ability classes
4
6
7
10
21
30
47
63
67
80
95
98
114
133
136
138
138
139
139
140
140
141
142
143
Contents
3
CONTENTS
Jetstream Intermediate
INTRODUCTION
page 4
LESSON 1
How would you describe
yourself?
LESSON 2
How do you want to
improve your English?
VOCABULARY
GRAMMAR
VOCABULARY PLUS page
61
The alphabet review
Numbers and symbols
review
Years and dates review
be (R)
Present simple (R)
Present continuous (R)
Past simple (R)
want / need (R)
Superlatives (R)
VOCABULARY
GRAMMAR
READING AND LISTENING
SPEAKING AND WRITING
Talking about yourself
Finding out about other
people
Discussing learning
strategies
Writing an action plan
READING AND LISTENING
SPEAKING AND WRITING
UNIT 1
Water
INTRODUCTION
page 7
LESSON 1
A very long way!
Present perfect v past simple Reading: He did it first
Infinitive of purpose
Reflexive pronouns
Talking about the Ice Bucket
Challenge and raising
money for charity
LESSON 2
Tap or bottled?
Modal verbs: can / can’t,
have to / don’t have to,
must / mustn’t,
ought to / ought not to,
should / shouldn’t
Reading: Water
Discussing ways to save
water
Writing a message
explaining things you can
do to save water
Listening 1: instructions for
doing two water sports
Listening 2: a talk about a
water sport
Demonstrating and
describing a sport
Giving a talk about a
regular activity
Words connected with
water
LESSON 3
Water activities
Water sports and equipment
EVERYDAY ENGLISH
VOCABULARY PLUS p62
Asking for more information
Wordbuilder: nouns from verbs; verbs with un- say and tell Focus on: could Networking
VOCABULARY
UNIT 2
Switch on!
Doing a quiz to learn more
about water
INTRODUCTION
TV genres
Words that go with drama,
show, programme
watch v look at
LESSON 1
Stories from Scandinavia
Adjectives for describing a
programme
page 15
LESSON 2
The world of telenovelas
GRAMMAR
SPEAKING AND WRITING
Talking about TV and the
kinds of programmes you
watch
Adverbs of frequency
Used to
Used to v usually
Reading: Nordic noir
Listening: information about
Hans Christian Andersen
Finding out what people
watched
Writing and filming a vlog
about past TV preferences
Present perfect continuous
for and since
Reading: Avenida Brasil
Discussing soap opera issues
Talking about long-running
TV programmes
Writing a scene from a soap
Reading: David
Attenborough and
Claudia Winkleman
Listening 1: a conversation
about male and female
presenters
Listening 2: an interview
with a former TV presenter
Giving a short presentation
about a TV presenter
Talking about attitudes to
female TV presenters
LESSON 3
Influential people
EVERYDAY ENGLISH
VOCABULARY PLUS p63
READING AND LISTENING
TV talk Requests and responses Asking / Telling people not to do things
Wordbuilder: un- and im- used to v get used to Focus on: verbs of the senses Phrasal verbs: turn
REVIEW Units 1 & 2 page 23; Aspects of culture: Water festivals
VOCABULARY
UNIT 3
What music does
page 25
4
Contents
GRAMMAR
READING AND LISTENING
SPEAKING AND WRITING
INTRODUCTION
Musical instruments
Talking about what
instruments people can
play
LESSON 1
Making music differently
Body metaphors (1)
could / was able to /
managed to
Reading: Against the odds
Talking about a time you
managed to do something
Writing about a friend’s
experience of a difficult
situation
LESSON 2
Music and rubbish
Where to put things
Past continuous; past
perfect
Reading: The world sends
us garbage. We send back
music.
Acting out a TV interview
LESSON 3
The busker
Saying what you like
Past conclusions – can’t /
could / must / might have
Listening: a conversation
about an extraordinary
busker
Giving a short talk about
a favourite song or piece
of music
EVERYDAY ENGLISH
VOCABULARY PLUS p64
Complimenting someone’s performance
Household tasks Collocations Phrasal verbs: make
VOCABULARY
UNIT 4
Is it art?
page 33
GRAMMAR
READING AND LISTENING
SPEAKING AND WRITING
INTRODUCTION
Types of art
Types of picture
Things we use to make art
Talking about street art
LESSON 1
Mystery attacks
People in the arts
Articles
Reading: Scallop
Deciding which work of art
should receive a prize
LESSON 2
Mystery man
Adjectives to describe
people
Comparison: considerably,
a little bit, a lot, nearly,
almost, far, much,
significantly, slightly
Reading: There he is – again
Comparing works of art
Writing a poem
LESSON 3
Mystery art
Adjectives to describe the
arts
Superlative sentences
Listening 1: part of a weekly
Arts programme
Listening 2: an apology
Describing works of art
Talking and disagreeing
about works of art
EVERYDAY ENGLISH
VOCABULARY PLUS p65
Discussing opinions and making judgements
Photography Where things are Collocations Art metaphors
READING AND LISTENING
SPEAKING AND WRITING
Reading: How well are you
managing your stress?
Talking about stressful
situations
something + make +
someone + adjective
First conditional
Listening: a conversation on
the therapist’s couch
Writing an ending to a story
Acting out a conversation
with a therapist
unless + first conditional
Reading: How does it work?
– the stress response
mechanism
Following instructions to
complete a diagram and
write a short description
the most / the least / more
… than / less … than
Listening 1 and 2: a
conversation about
research on stressful jobs
Listening 3: a description of
a stressful job
Saying how you feel about
your job or studies
Writing about what you do
and why it’s enjoyable or
stressful
REVIEW Units 3 & 4 page 41; Aspects of culture: Musical instruments
VOCABULARY
UNIT 5
Chill out!
INTRODUCTION
page 43
LESSON 1
How did you react?
-ed / -ing adjectives
Words connected with the
body
LESSON 2
Face to face with a bear!
GRAMMAR
LESSON 3
Nine to five
Words connected with work
EVERYDAY ENGLISH
VOCABULARY PLUS p66
Giving advice and making suggestions
Parts of the body review Jobs review Wordbuilder: affixes; over- Focus on: get
VOCABULARY
GRAMMAR
READING AND LISTENING
SPEAKING AND WRITING
UNIT 6
Consequences
INTRODUCTION
Animals and categories
Phrases for certainty and
possibility
page 51
LESSON 1
What would we do without
them?
The natural world
Second conditional
Reading: Would we die if
honeybees didn’t exist?
Listening: a radio interview
with a scientist
Making notes
Giving a short talk
Past obligation and
permission
Reading: What a load of
junk!
Talking about a fast-food
experiment
Writing a video script
LESSON 2
Hamburgers and pies!
LESSON 3
Magic or myth?
Superfoods
Medicine and health
Listening 1: a conversation
Giving a talk about a food
about an ancient but
with special properties
modern remedy
Talking about your favourite
Listening 2: street interviews
home remedy
about home remedies
EVERYDAY ENGLISH
VOCABULARY PLUS p67
Describing things
Irregular plurals Phrasal verbs: more or less of something Focus on: the earth Wordbuilder: compound nouns; dis-
REVIEW Units 5 & 6 page 59; Aspects of culture: Natural remedies
Pages 68 – 73
Pages 74 – 77
Information gap activities
and extra material
Stories
Pages 78 – 84
Pages 85 – 91
Pages 92 – 93
Grammar reference
Transcripts
Pronunciation and irregular verbs
KEY
audio (on CD and mp3 online)
P
pronunciation activities
test your memory
similar or different to your language?
6 watch the video
EXPLORE ONLINE
extend your learning with online projects
VIDEO OPTION
make a short film with your phone or camera
Contents
5
Jetstream Intermediate
components
For the student:
Student’s Book
The Student’s Book contains 6 units, each
consisting of an introductory page plus three
double-page lessons and an Everyday English
section at the end.
It also contains the following:
• a two-page Review unit after every two units
• a Vocabulary plus section, with a page for each
unit
• a comprehensive grammar reference section
• information-gap activities and extra material
• complete transcripts for the audio
• a Pronunciation spread focusing on
problematic sounds
• an irregular verbs list.
Workbook with audio
The Workbook contains 6 units of five pages –
four pages covering the three SB lessons, and one
page for Vocabulary plus and Everyday English.
It also contains the following:
• a Review quiz after every two units
• a Check your progress test after every two units
• one page of dedicated Writing practice for
each unit, giving students a structured writing
development course
• a ‘do-it-yourself’ dictionary listing the key
vocabulary (with phonetics) for each unit and
space for students to write their translations or
definitions.
E-zone
The e-zone is an online resource for students and
teachers containing:
• the video for all the Everyday English pages
• a cloud book – an interactive version of the
Student’s Book, including all video and audio
• cyber homework – interactive activities
covering grammar, vocabulary, reading,
listening and dialogues. They’re assigned by
the teacher in a virtual classroom and have
automatic feedback. (They can also be used in
self-study mode – see below.)
• mp3 audio files
6
Introduction
•
online training – pronunciation exercises,
exam practice (Cambridge PET, TOEFL, IELTS
and TOEIC) and cyber homework in self-study
mode (extra practice)
•
CLIL projects.
For more information on the e-zone, see page 9.
For the teacher:
Teacher’s Guide with class audio CDs
The Teacher’s Guide contains full teaching notes
for each unit, including all transcripts, keys and
useful background and cultural information, plus
extra ideas for early finishers and mixed-ability
suggestions.
Three class audio CDs contain all the listening
material for the Student’s Book.
The Teacher’s Guide also contains the following
extra material:
• one task per unit with accompanying teaching
notes
• three ‘technique banks’ giving ideas in the
following areas:
Using the video
Using memory games
Working with mixed-ability classes
Interactive book for whiteboards DVD-ROM
E-zone
Full access to the students’ area plus:
• the video for all Everyday English pages
• mp3 audio files
• downloadable Teacher’s Guide with answer keys
• Helbling placement test
• Testbuilder containing 12 unit tests covering
grammar, vocabulary, functions and the four
skills and six progress tests.
Jetstream approach – a
summary
Motivation
Research shows that motivation is key to learning;
to learn, students need to be interested! Jetstream
has been written to be highly motivating for
students, and includes the following:
•
interesting and relevant topics
•
stimulating and often thought-provoking
photos
•
lots of personalisation activities where students
are encouraged to talk about themselves
•
communicative activities which give students a
real purpose for completing a task
•
Vocabulary
It’s increasingly recognised that vocabulary is just
as important as – or perhaps even more important
than – grammar when learning a language.
Jetstream has a high vocabulary input so that
students can understand, speak, read and write
with ease. Stimulating and unusual pictures and
motivating activities ensure students absorb the
vocabulary easily, and there’s plenty of practice.
Most of the three main lessons in Jetstream have a
vocabulary component. In addition:
•
Vocabulary plus pages (one for each unit) at
the back of the SB provide an opportunity for
vocabulary enrichment.
•
highly motivating tasks throughout
the Student’s Book, and also a bank of
photocopiable tasks in the Teacher’s Guide
Focus on sections within the Vocabulary plus
pages highlight and practise high-frequency
words and phrases and their different uses and
meanings.
•
•
a Song / Poem / Video / Music Link in every
unit which encourages students to use their
English in a fun and less formal way
Preposition park sections in the Review units
focus on prepositions, usually within an
interesting text.
•
•
Everyday English pages at the end of every
unit which provide immediately useful
conversations practising different functions,
including short video clips
Similar or different? activities ( ) get students
comparing new words with words which are
the same or different in their own language.
Reading
•
plenty of games and game-like activities.
Grammar
Grammar is an important element in Jetstream. It’s
dealt with in the following way:
•
It’s introduced gradually – each of the three
main lessons in a unit usually has a grammar
point. This enables the grammar to be
introduced step-by-step, practised and easily
absorbed.
•
It’s revised in the Review units that occur after
every two units.
•
The grammar for a lesson is introduced in
context. The grammar form is highlighted and
students are given activities where they deduce
the form and meaning.
•
Activities are realistic and meaningful.
•
A clear and straightforward grammar reference
section at the end of the Student’s Book
explains each lesson’s grammar.
•
The Irregular verbs section provides an
invaluable reference for students.
The main reading focus in Jetstream is usually in
Lesson 2 of each unit, but there are often other,
shorter reading texts elsewhere.
There’s a variety of high-interest text types – reallife stories, articles, quizzes, blogs, etc. Where
possible at this level, texts are based on real
people, places and events.
•
Activities develop students’ ability to scan
a text for its general meaning and guess
meaning from context.
•
Texts, whether in the form of human-interest
articles or fictional stories, are absorbing and
memorable and a key way of learning and
practising language.
Other sections that provide very short, highinterest texts for additional reading comprehension
relevant to the topic are:
•
Song / Poem / Video / Music Link
•
Did you know?
The Aspects of culture section in the Review units
also provides additional reading matter. It offers
interesting and practical information on different
cultures and should lead to stimulating discussions.
Introduction
7
Writing
Regular short Writing sections in the Student’s
Book provide guided writing practice through a
variety of tasks. The core writing course, however,
is to be found at the back of the Workbook, which
includes a full page of guided writing tasks per
unit. In this writing development course, students
cover the following areas:
• an email petition
• a TV blog
• a celebrity profile
• a description of an artwork
• a letter of advice
• an online restaurant review
• an online discussion post
• a description of a film
• a flyer
• a fairy tale
• a description of a game
• a narrative.
There are reminders of useful expressions and
other language features: connectors, reduced
clauses, time expressions, etc.
Check it! sections allow students to review and
improve their work.
Listening
The main listening focus in Jetstream is in Lesson
3 of each unit, but there are often short listening
activities elsewhere. The Everyday English page
provides further listening practice in the form of
functional dialogues.
To train students in useful and relevant listening
skills, the listening texts reflect a variety of real-life
situations, including conversations, interviews,
talks, reports and radio programmes.
The transcripts of the listening texts can be found
at the back of the Student’s Book for students’
reference and are also reproduced with the
relevant activity notes in the Teacher’s Guide.
Speaking
For many learners of English, speaking is the most
important language skill.
There are speaking activities at all stages of a
lesson in Jetstream:
•
At this level, activities are carefully designed
so that students can express themselves freely
without making a lot of mistakes.
8
Introduction
•
The main speaking section of a lesson generally
has longer speaking activities than earlier in the
lesson.
•
The photos, cartoons, listening and reading
texts all provide stimulating platforms for
speaking activities.
•
You first! at the start of some lessons uses a
short question to get students engaged with
the lesson topic immediately.
•
Everybody up! sections encourage students
to stand up and move around the class,
interacting with each other to find out
information.
•
The Link and Did you know? sections in the
main units, and the Aspects of culture sections
in the Review units, also provide platforms for
stimulating discussions.
•
The photocopiable tasks in the Teacher’s
Guide and the information-gap activities at
the back of the Student’s Book provide further
communicative practice.
Pronunciation
Short pronunciation activities in the Everyday
English sections provide clear practice of some
common areas, including:
• specific sounds
• word and sentence stress
• intonation.
In addition, students are encouraged to listen
to and repeat the main vocabulary groups
throughout the book.
The Pronunciation section on page 92 of the
Student’s Book includes a phonemic chart for
students’ reference and practice of sounds that
students often have difficulty with.
Consolidation and review
Consolidation of recently acquired language
and regular revision are crucial to learning. After
every two units, there’s a Review unit that revises
key language from these units. Each Review unit
contextualises the language through reading and
sometimes listening texts. There are also grammar
exercises and writing and speaking tasks.
The Workbook provides further practice and
testing of the language in a unit. In addition, after
every two units in the Workbook, there’s a Review
quiz. This is followed by a Check your progress
test.
Online resources – available on e-zone
Cyber homework
Interactive activities assigned to students by their
teacher within an online virtual classroom. Results
and feedback are automatically given when the
deadline fixed by the teacher has been reached.
HELBLING Placement Test
Designed to give students and teachers of English
a quick way of assessing the level of a student’s
knowledge of English grammar and usage.
Projects
Open-ended tasks on both cultural and global
themes, where students can embed other
resources such as web links or files and share them
with the teacher and their class.
Online training
Resources and interactive activities for individual
student access. Includes:
• exam practice
• pronunciation
• all exercises from the cyber homework in selfstudy mode.
Cloud book
An interactive version of the Student’s Book and
Workbook, where students can access all audio
and video content at the click of a mouse or touch
of a screen. Students can complete the activities,
check their results and add their own notes.
How to integrate an LMS (a Learning Management System) into your teaching
Initial assessment
Assessment
HELBLING Placement Test
Exam practice
Testbuilder
1
Planning
>
2
Scope & sequence
Teacher’s Guide
>
6
5
>
4
Virtual class and self-study practice
Lesson enrichment
•
•
•
•
Projects
Online training
Cyber homework
Student downloads
•
•
•
•
3
Class routine
Student’s Book
Workbook
Resources
Videos
Interactive book for whiteboards
Teacher downloads
Introduction
9
Unit overview
Everybody up!
This is a chance for students
to move around the classroom
and use specific language in a
controlled way to get information
from other students. This kind
of short, intensive practice
can be very lively and also very
rewarding if students succeed
in completing the task using the
language resources available to
them. In addition, it allows them
to interact with lots of different
people. The act of physically
getting up and moving around
is also mentally refreshing; being
physically active helps us to
learn. Students may naturally
find that they engage in longer
conversations than the activity
requires. If time allows, this is
good and enjoyable practice for
them. However, it’s a good idea
to set a time limit for this type of
activity.
Did you know?
These are very short, interesting
pieces of information related
to the theme of the lesson. The
section can usually be done at
any point in the lesson. The
teacher’s notes sometimes
suggest ways of exploiting it, but
if students want to know more,
they can be encouraged to search
online.
10
Introduction
Explore online
This is an opportunity for students
to go beyond the page and find out
more about some aspect of the topic:
a sort of mini project. They should
do the research online, make notes
and report back, working either alone
or in pairs. You may want to set this
up in the classroom by suggesting
possible websites or just by eliciting
suggestions for words and phrases to
type into the search engine. As with
the Link feature (see page 14), there’s
a natural mixed-ability element to this
section.
You first!
You’ll find a You first! box on
many of the large photos at
the beginning of a lesson. It
has a triple purpose. Firstly, to
engage students and get them
saying something immediately.
Secondly, to allow students to
use what they already know
and boost their confidence.
And thirdly, to give you an idea
of what and how much they
already know so that you can
target your teaching much
more effectively. What if your
students don’t respond at all?
That’s fine. Now you know. Just
move on and start to teach them
something.
Search and think
These exercises invite students to look
through a text that they’ve recently read
or listened to, in order to find particular
grammatical structures (or sometimes
categories of vocabulary) and think about
how they’re used or what they mean,
before going on to practise them in
further exercises.
Introduction
11
Grammar reference
There’s a useful grammar
reference at the back of the
Student’s Book. Each main
grammar point from the
grammar boxes throughout
the book has a relevant
section in the grammar
reference.
Take a break
Apart from providing tiny
practical texts to read, these
sections are there to help
students unwind from time
to time. Why? Because, quite
simply, we don’t learn well
when we’re stressed; we learn
best when we’re relaxed. These
little exercises give students
the opportunity to switch off
for a few moments, in order
to recharge their batteries and
come back to the task in hand
with renewed energy!
If it’s a piece of advice, talk
about it with students. If it’s
a physical exercise, students
can read it and follow the
instructions. Do it there and
then in the classroom if you
can. Then you can use it again
and again, whenever it’s useful
(see, for example, SB page 33,
volume B, where students are
asked to massage their ‘brain
buttons’).
12
Introduction
Mini-talk
Students write down their ideas
in answer to questions relating
to the lesson and then shape
them up into a short talk, using
digital presentation media where
appropriate. They then present
their talk to a (small) group of
other students.
Predict
Students use different elements
(photos, titles, questions, etc) to
predict what’s in a text. The idea
is to motivate them to engage
with the material; to give them a
very good reason for reading or
listening to see if they were right!
Think
This is used to signal a
creative or critical-thinking
exercise. Students are asked
to work something out for
themselves, give their opinions
or comments or use their
creativity, rather than find an
answer directly on the page.
A simple example might
be where a text describes a
problem at work and students
are invited to come up with
solutions. Encouraging
students to think creatively
means they increase their
engagement with the material.
The increased alertness
enhances their learning
capacity.
With these sections – as
indeed with many others – it’s
a good idea to give students a
chance to look at the material
and think about (or even write
down) their ideas individually
(for say 30 seconds) before
they start talking to each
other. Some students are quick
thinkers and talkers, while
others need more time. Giving
them ‘thinking time’ evens it
out a little.
Introduction
13
Information gap
There’s an information-gap
activity in every second unit.
In these, students need to get
information from each other in
order to complete a task. All the
material students need to do
the tasks is in the back of the
Student’s Book on pages 68–73.
Video option
Students think or find out about –
and/or take a photo of – something
related to the lesson. After writing
and/or making notes, they record
a short piece to camera using their
smartphones or tablets (like a video
blog). They can then share their
video clip with other students or
upload it to a video-sharing site
such as YouTube if they want.
14
Introduction
Link
Each unit contains a Link section,
featuring a song, a poem, a piece of
music or a video clip which relates to
themes and topics in the lesson. These
sections utilise students’ natural interest
in these things to motivate them and
transfer the topic language to a new
context. The tasks give students the
opportunity to listen to / read / view
the material and then research online
to answer some questions or do a small
associated activity. They then bring the
information back to the class, which
should often stimulate lively discussions.
There’s a natural mixed-ability element:
more competent students will be able to
take it further than those who are less
competent.
Similar or different?
This symbol often occurs where new vocabulary is introduced and
it suggests that you ask students which words are the same as
or similar to words in their own language – and which are very
different. This feature of Accelerated (or Holistic) Learning (see
page 20) aims to draw students’ attention to the fact that they
already know some words. It serves to reassure them, build their
confidence and lighten their learning load. It can also give them
a basis for wordbuilding (eg the fact that words ending in -ion
in English may also end in -ion in their language). Suddenly they
know ten words, not just one.
Guess
Asking students to ‘guess’
answers before reading or
listening to information not
only gets them to interact,
it also frees them up from
having to know the ‘right’
answer and thus inhibiting
their response. In addition,
it prepares them for the
text and gives a valid reason
for reading or listening to
something – to see if they
were right. For this reason,
it’s very important not to
confirm if students are right
or not in their guesses. Just
say things like Hmm or That’s
interesting or Possibly, etc
and let the text provide the
answers. These exercises are
similar to Predict ones, but
involve more guesswork,
rather than ideas based on
evidence.
Note: Very often, if the word is a similar one, the difference is in
the pronunciation – especially the word stress – or the spelling.
Also, Similar or different? is obviously easier if you have a
unilingual class, especially when you’re familiar with the students’
mother tongue, but it can work well with a multilingual class,
where students can compare words in different languages.
Introduction
15
Listening
This symbol tells you
that there’s recorded material
that goes with the activity. This
can either be a full listening
text, as here, or it might be
listening to check answers and
hear the correct pronunciation.
Full transcripts are given in the
back of the Student’s Book.
Takeaway language
These exercises are optional.
They pull out useful everyday
expressions from a text or
dialogue and present them for
students to think about and
‘take away’ and use themselves.
Your story
Students generally enjoy personalising what
they’ve just learnt; these exercises ask them
to think about some aspect of the lesson as
it relates to them personally, and then share
their ‘story’ with other members of their
group.
16
Introduction
Everyday English
This section provides practice in
the everyday functional language
that students need when
interacting with people, such as
making suggestions, giving advice,
discussing opinions and so on.
Role-play
Students are given
a scenario / roles /
questions, often based
on a dialogue they’ve
just heard, and are asked
to script a short scene
for themselves, which
they then act out. The
level of support given
can be adapted to suit
students’ abilities, ranging
from allowing them
to look at the original
text as they work to
completely reinventing the
conversation off the top
of their heads.
6 Video
The main conversation in the oddnumbered Everyday English sections
appears on video, which provides
extra contextualisation for the
functional language. (If you don’t have
the video or prefer not to use it, then
just play the audio version.)
See also Using the video on page 141.
P Pronunciation
The pronunciation activities appear in the Everyday
English section of each unit of the Student’s Book.
At Intermediate level, there’s work on stress and
intonation, as well as sounds, as these can often pose
problems for students. All the pronunciation activities
are recorded so that students can hear the correct
sounds or stress. There’s also a Pronunciation section
at the back of the Student’s Book on page 92. This
provides practice in various key areas that often cause
students difficulty, including weak forms, consonant
clusters and diphthongs.
Introduction
17
Review
Three Review units revise key
language from the preceding two
units, using a reading text as the
main presentation.
Finish it
These exercises are personalisation tasks
where students complete short sentence
stems with their own information or ideas,
and then compare with other students
(often in an Everybody up! activity).
18
Introduction
Aspects of culture
Each of the Review units
finishes with an Aspects of
culture section. This is often an
opportunity to reflect on how
people do things differently (or
not!) in different parts of the
world and how we can begin to
be sensitive to these differences
and act accordingly. There’s
usually a short reading text with
a task or questions, often leading
to a discussion and a comparison
with the students’ own culture(s).
Preposition park
This section appears in many of the Review units
and provides a short text that revises and extends
prepositions that students already know, enabling
them to recycle prepositions in a new way, or
introduces new ones.
Memory
This symbol represents your
brain! Memory is a crucial
component in learning
anything and it’s like a muscle:
the more you exercise it,
the stronger it’ll be. These
simple games ask students to
remember a variety of things:
vocabulary items, facts from an
article and so on. But you can
do a lot more activities than the
ones suggested here (see pages
142–143). And remember that
the more you get students
to exercise their memory in
English, the more it’ll serve
them in other aspects of their
life as well.
Introduction
19
A final word
The features new to Jetstream, which occur
throughout the units, are informed – in a
gentle way – by some of the key principles of
Holistic Learning (sometimes called Accelerated
Learning*):
1 We learn with our body as well as our mind:
they are connected. Hence the value we attach
to bringing more physical activities into the
classroom and paying attention to students’
physical well-being.
2 Different learners prefer different kinds of
input. Some people learn more with their eyes,
some more with their ears and some more
with their bodies and movement. We aim to
provide a variety of activities to reflect these
preferences.
3 What we learn with emotion, we tend to
remember best. We hope to engage students’
emotions through the use of stories, songs and
games – and making them laugh.
4 Our memory is very powerful … and we can
make it work even better. The reason for all the
little memory-training games is to give students
practice in using their memory, and aid their
learning.
20
Introduction
5 People know a lot already – more than they
think. Good teaching and good material can
help to make students aware of what they
already know and boost their confidence.
6 People are different. Some people are more
outgoing and sociable, while others are more
introspective and reflective. The former readily
enjoy interacting with others, while the latter
often prefer to work on their own. They usually
welcome time to think on their own too,
before being asked to participate in an activity.
As teachers, we need to try to cater for these
differences.
*The roots of Accelerated Learning go back to the
Bulgarian educator, Georgi Lozanov, who developed
something called ‘Suggestopaedia’ in the early 1960s.
Helping learners feel comfortable, relaxed and confident
meant that they were able to absorb and remember more
information more quickly. That’s it in a nutshell!
Introduction
UNIT
FOCUS
FUNCTIONS: talking
about yourself; finding out about other people; discussing learning strategies
Lesson 1 How would you
describe yourself? pp4–5
Aim
The focus of this first lesson in the introductory
unit is to give students the opportunity to find out
more about each other.
Warm-up
Introduce the topic with a game. Write the
headings politician, novelist, singer, sportsperson,
musician on the board. Put students into two
teams and give them five minutes to come up with
as many famous people in each category as they
can. They get a point for every name, plus a bonus
point for every name the other team hasn’t got.
The team with the most points wins.
1 Students stand up and walk around the
room to introduce themselves to each other.
Model the activity and tell them to include
extra information, such as where they’re from
and any hobbies they have. Also encourage
students to ask extra questions to keep the
conversation going. Monitor and write down
any mistakes or good sentences you hear. You
can come back to these later if you have time.
Alternatively, do this as a game with students
in two lines facing each other. They introduce
themselves to the person opposite, then move
down the line and repeat the process until they
get back to where they started.
Extra ideas: Focus on intonation
and different ways of saying Hi (in a
monotonous way or an enthusiastic way).
Ask how many /aɪ/ sounds there are in the
three example sentences (Ten).
2 Students look at the photos and answer the
questions in groups. Get feedback and ask
extra questions (eg Have you read any of
Paulo Coelho’s books? Did you like them?) to
encourage personalisation and speaking.
MA Encourage early finishers to use their
smartphones or mobile devices to find out a bit
more about some of the people pictured.
Answers
A Aung San Suu Kyi (Burmese politician)
B Paulo Coelho (Brazilian novelist)
C JK Rowling (British novelist)
D Buffy Sainte-Marie (Canadian singersongwriter)
E Muhammad Ali (American boxer)
F Manu Chao (French / Spanish musician)
Extra idea: To promote pairwork and
discussion, ask students to look at the
photo at the top of the page. They then
discuss these questions with a partner:
What does the body language of the two
men tell you?
How important is a firm handshake?
How important is eye contact?
What other things can we do when we first
meet people?
How do things change when we meet
people from other cultures?
Get feedback and check their ideas.
3 Students look at the quotations then work in
pairs and guess who said each one. Which
quotation did they like best, and why?
Encourage them to explain why they found a
quotation funny, interesting or surprising, eg
It’s surprising that JK Rowling doesn’t believe
in magic, because she wrote the Harry Potter
books.
Answers
1 Buffy Sainte-Marie 2 Manu Chao
3 Aung San Suu Kyi 4 Paulo Coelho
5 JK Rowling 6 Muhammad Ali
4 Students look at the highlighted parts of
the quotations in 3 and rewrite them in a
personalised way. Do the first one together
as a model and encourage students to write
funny and creative quotations.
Introduction
21
5 Students walk around the room, introducing
themselves to each other and sharing their
ideas from 4.
Introduction, page 15. Students work in pairs
to complete the quotations with the phrases
in the box. Compare answers as a class to see
how many pairs agreed.
Extra idea: A few students report back
facts that they learnt about their classmates.
They’ll need to change the first person
statements they heard into third person
statements.
Answers
1 a great big baked potato
2 an education
3 superheroes
4 story; story
5 money
6 an uneventful and safe life
Quotation 5 comes from Can’t buy me love
by The Beatles.
Song link
Quotations 1 and 2 come from songs.
1 I’m not a queen, I’m a woman are words
from a song called Until it’s time for you to
go written by Buffy Sainte-Marie in 1965 and
also later sung by Nancy Sinatra. It’s written in
English, and the next line is Take my hand.
2 I like planes, I like you. I like travelling, I like
you is the translation of words from a 2001
Manu Chao song called Me gustas tú, which is
in Spanish (and a bit of French). The next line
is Me gusta la mañana, me gustas tú (I like the
morning, I like you).
Ask students to find a translation online of Me
gustas tú or, if they speak Spanish, have them
translate the lyrics themselves or check an
existing translation (some are terrible!).
Culture notes
• Buffy Sainte-Marie is a Canadian singersongwriter, born 20 February, 1941. She
has campaigned throughout her life for
the rights of Native Americans and takes a
keen interest in education and social issues.
She has released over 20 albums in her
career, which spans over five decades.
• Manu Chao was born in France on 21 June,
1961, to Spanish parents. He’s played in
several bands, the best-known of which
is probably Mano Negra. His musical style
has a variety of influences, including rock
and punk. He sings in many languages,
including Spanish, French, English,
Portuguese, Galician and Arabic, often
mixing several languages in the same song
(as he does in Me gustas tú).
6
22
GUESS When you see GUESS in front
of an instruction, it means students can talk
about what they think the answers are, but
they don’t have to know for sure. For more
information about these exercises, see the
Introduction
Extra idea: Ask students if they’ve heard of
the people quoted in 6. They could research
those they don’t know for homework.
7 Write the sentence starter All I want ... on the
board. Students complete it in their own words
and read out their ideas. They then complete
two of the other sentences from 6 and share
their ideas with a partner.
8
1.2 Students look at the photo and speech
bubble and say what the three questions are
(If you were a colour, what colour would you
be? If you were a car, what car would you
be? If you were a bird, what bird would you
be?). Play the recording and pause after the
first answer. Elicit that this only answers one
of the questions (If you were a colour, what
colour would you be?) and ask students for the
answer (red). Play the rest of the recording for
students to make notes of the answers they
hear. They shouldn’t try to write down every
word. They should then check their answers
with a partner.
Transcript
1 If I were a colour, what colour would I be?
Oh, red, of course!
2 A colour? Um, I think I’d be black.
3 Green? Blue? Purple and pink? Absolutely
no idea. It’s a very silly question.
4 What kind of car would I be? What kind of
question is that?
5 Car? Oh, that’s a no-brainer. I’d definitely
be a Porsche! Definitely!
6 A Mini! Oh no, hang on a minute, I’d be a
BMW Z4 Roadster.
7 A bird? Oh, I haven’t a clue. I don’t know
any birds. A chicken?!
8 Ooh. That’s an interesting question. I think
I’d be a ... pigeon!
9 Um, birds, birds ... oh I know! An eagle! I’d
be an eagle!
Answers
1 red 2 black 3 – 4 – 5 Porsche
6 BMW Z4 Roadster 7 chicken 8 pigeon
9 eagle
Extra idea: Write the structure If you were
a ___, what ___ would you be? on the
board and ask students to think of other
similar questions (eg If you were a fruit,
what fruit would you be? If you were a
shape, what shape would you be?) to ask.
9 Students discuss the questions in pairs. Get
feedback and encourage them to give reasons
for their ideas. Give them a chance to listen
again if necessary.
10 TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE When you see
TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE in front of an
instruction, it indicates a focus on colloquial
language that’s not featured elsewhere. For
more information about these exercises, see
the Introduction, page 16. Students match the
phrases from the interviews. Check answers
and elicit what each expression means from
the context.
Answers
1c 2d 3a
4b
11 THINK When you see THINK in front of
an instruction, it means students should think
about ideas on their own for a moment before
they talk to other students (think–pair–share).
This type of exercise often asks students to be
imaginative or creative, or to work something
out. In this case, students look at the ideas in
the box and think about related metaphors.
For more information about these exercises,
see the Introduction, page 13.
Ask students if they know what the word
metaphor means (= an expression, often found
in literature, that describes a person or object
by referring to something that is considered
to have similar characteristics to that person
or object). Students make metaphors about
themselves using the ideas in the box.
Extra idea: Review lexical sets by doing
a column dictation. Dictate two or three
different headings to students, who have
to write as many related words as they can
in a list under each heading (eg Furniture:
wardrobe, cupboard, sofa; Animals: cat,
dog, mouse, lion, etc).
12 Students work in groups of three or four and
invite each other to guess what they wrote for
each idea in 11. Get feedback and check the
funniest and best ideas.
Poem link
a Students work in pairs to see how many
different lines they can make. Encourage them
to be as creative as they want! Explain that
bananas can also mean ‘mad’ or ‘crazy’.
b Students use their smartphones or tablets to
search for the poem on the internet. They
should be able to find it by typing very poet
bananas into their search engine. They then
discuss the questions in pairs and compare
the poem with their answers to a) – did any of
their lines match the actual poem? Encourage
them to search for an image of Georgio de
Chirico’s painting.
Answers
1 The Uncertainty of the Poet
2 Wendy Cope
3 It is based on Georgio de Chirico’s 1913
painting of the same name.
Extra idea: Give each student a line
or lines from the poem and have them
collaborate in a class recital.
Culture note
Wendy Cope is a contemporary English
poet, born 21 July, 1945. She spent 15
years as a primary school teacher before
becoming a full-time writer, critic and poet.
She has won several awards for her lighthearted, often comical, poetry, and some of
her poems have been used as song lyrics.
In this poem, she plays with English syntax
by using the same words in a different
order to form each ‘verse’.
Introduction
23
Lesson 2 How do you want to
improve your English? p6
3
Aim
The focus of this second lesson in the introductory
unit is to encourage students to think about why
they’re studying English.
Warm-up
Students look at the four photos on the page and
think about which skills are being used in each
one (top left: reading; top middle: speaking and
listening; top right: writing; bottom left: listening,
speaking and writing).
1 Students think about the questions for a
moment, then discuss their ideas in small
groups.
Alternatively, ask students to identify the three
tenses in questions 1–3 (present continuous,
present simple, going to future) and elicit why
each tense is used (present continuous: to
describe actions happening at the moment;
present simple: to describe things we do
regularly; going to future: to describe future
plans).
Also focus on the use of be able to as an
infinitive of can in question 7 to describe ability.
Tip: The process of asking students to think
about a topic or question individually,
then discuss it with a partner before
finally sharing ideas with the whole class
is sometimes known as ‘think–pair–
share’. This technique is useful in many
situations.
2
FINISH IT When you see FINISH IT in front
of an instruction, it indicates a personalisation
exercise where students complete short
sentence stems with their own information. For
more information about these exercises, see
the Introduction, page 18.
Students complete the sentence in their
own words, then share their ideas with a partner.
Extra idea: Do a quick class survey to find
out students’ most important learning
goals. This will also provide you with
helpful information about students’ needs
that will help you plan future lessons.
24
Introduction
EVERYBODY UP! When you see
EVERYBODY UP! in front of an instruction,
it means that this is a chance for students
to move around the classroom and use the
language they’ve learnt. For more information
about these exercises, see the Introduction,
page 10. Students walk around and share their
goals from 2 with each other. When they’ve
found someone with the same goal, they
should take a note of that person’s name.
Alternatively, students write each goal on a
separate piece of paper. Collect their ideas and
read them out one by one. Stick them on the
board, grouping similar ideas together (get
students involved in deciding how to do the
grouping). At the end of the process, students
draw circles around groups of ideas to show
which ideas are most / least popular.
Extra idea: Students write out their goals
and put them up around the room, so they
are constantly reminded of them.
4 Brainstorm a few ideas with students for how
they can improve their English outside the
classroom (eg using social media, setting up a
class library with graded readers, compiling a
list of useful websites). Put them in groups and
ask them to think of as many strategies as they
can. Set a time limit so they work quickly. Elicit
their ideas and encourage them to write down
and remember as many as possible.
5
Students listen to the recording and
complete the table. Pause the recording as
necessary.
1.3
Answers
A spoken English watch a movie they know
in English, first with
Spanish subtitles, then
with English subtitles, then
without subtitles
B vocabulary
translate song lyrics
C pronunciation
read short, simplified readers
and listen to the online
audio at the same time
D reading skills
read newspaper articles on
the internet
E
writing
write letters to a penpal
F
everything
come to class and start
following other people’s
suggestions
Transcript
A I want to improve my understanding of
spoken English, so I download films in
English – ones I’ve already seen, so I know
the story. I watch them with Spanish
subtitles the first time, and then I watch
them again with English subtitles, and
then the third time I watch them with no
subtitles at all!
B I need to increase my vocabulary, so I listen
to songs while I’m driving, and if I really like
a song, I search for the lyrics online later
on, and translate them if there are bits I
can’t understand. Then, when I listen again
the next day, I can understand what I’m
listening to!
C I read a lot in English – newspapers,
magazines – and I love those short,
simplified readers you can get at different
levels. You can get an audio track online,
and so you can read and listen together or
do one or the other. Listening and reading
at the same time is really good for your
pronunciation and that’s one of the things I
want to work on.
D Yeah, I’ve found some great websites
where you can read newspaper articles in
English at different levels too. They’re really
interesting and up to date, and you can
test your level before you begin, from very
easy to quite difficult. I have to focus on my
reading skills because I need to read books
and articles in English for my studies.
E There are sites where you can find a penpal
to write to in English, too. I’ve done that.
My penpal’s from Ireland, and we write to
each other about once a week. I tell her
about things in Ankara and she tells me
what’s happening in Dublin. I need to work
on my writing skills, so it’s a great way to
practise, and next year I’m going to Dublin
to see her!
F Um, I want to improve everything!
Listening, speaking, reading, writing,
pronunciation – everything! But I don’t do
anything much outside the classroom. At
least, I haven’t up to now – I’ve just come
to class. But it isn’t enough, is it? And
listening to everybody else, it sounds like it
really makes a difference and is lots of fun.
I think I’m going to start!
Tip: Listening is an individual task, so
encourage pairwork by asking students
to check their answers with a partner
after you play the recording the first
time. This helps them share ideas and
information and also increases learner
interaction and speaking.
6
1.3 Play the recording again for students to
compare their answers to 5 with the lists they
wrote in 4. Which strategies were the same,
which ones were new?
7 In pairs, students discuss the strategies they
would like to use. They write their top five
ideas, then compare with another pair.
8 Students look at the example. Elicit why be
going to is used (to describe future plans) and
ask students to write their own action plans.
They then compare with a partner.
Vocabulary plus p61
This section provides an opportunity for vocabulary
enrichment. It’s flexible and can be used in several
ways. It can be done as a complete lesson or
alternatively, you could practise a vocabulary set
when you have time to spare or give a Vocabulary
plus activity to early finishers.
The alphabet review
1 Students circle only the letters where they’re
sure about the pronunciation. Walk around the
classroom as they do this and ask individual
students to say one or two of the letters they
have circled.
2
Students can either point to the
letter(s) they find tricky or say something like
the letter before / after / between ... Play the
recording for them to repeat in chorus.
2.20
Extra idea: Ask students to say each tricky
letter ten times in a row!
Tip: Having the class repeat in chorus may
make it harder to monitor individual
pronunciation, but it’s very motivating for
weaker students, as they are happier to
participate when they don’t think their
mistakes will be heard.
Introduction
25
3
THINK This will really get students to think
laterally! Look at the example with them
and ensure they understand what the letters
represent (the initial letters of one, two, three,
etc). They then look at the second sequence
and read the clue (2 is a bit like 1.). Encourage
them to think of another number sequence
that begins with the letters given. They then
work out the other sequences in pairs.
MA Weaker students may need extra
prompting. You could give them the full
sequences (ie 2 T, T, T, F, F, S, S, E, N; 3 M, T, W,
T, F, S, S; 4 J, F, M, A, M, J, J, A, S, O, N, D; 5 R,
O, Y, G, B, I, V) as well as asking them to read
the clues and look at the picture.
Answers
oh / nought / zero / nil / love ten
a hundred a thousand ten thousand
a hundred thousand a million
one eleven a hundred and ten
one thousand, one hundred
ten thousand and one
a hundred and ten thousand
one million, one hundred thousand
0 is said in different ways (see 6).
Background notes
Generally speaking, you use the indefinite
article before hundred, thousand, million,
etc. The exception is when the number
consists of more than one part, in which
case one is used:
a thousand pounds
one thousand and ten pounds
Occasionally the number one can be used
with hundred, thousand, etc for emphasis:
There are more than one hundred spots on
that dog!
Answers
Initial letters of ...
1 numbers 1–10
2 numbers 10–90 counting in tens
3 the days of the week
4 the months of the year
5 the colours of the rainbow
Extra idea: Challenge students to think of
more ‘puzzles’ like this.
4 Students work in pairs. They shouldn’t tell or
show their partner the words they’ve chosen.
Numbers and symbols review
6 Write the different pronunciations of 0 on
the board. Students cover their books and try
to think of different contexts in which each
pronunciation is used. They then open their
books and match the pronunciations to the
uses.
Answers
1 nil 2 zero 3 oh*
4 nought / oh / zero* 5 love
However advanced students are, numbers are
always something they find difficult – hence this
review. And while some students may dislike
the kind of problem-solving they’re asked to
do in 7 and 8, others will welcome a fairly rare
opportunity to play with numbers!
* There is some difference in usage between
British and American English. For telephone
numbers, British English uses oh, whereas
American English tends to use zero. Nought
is almost exclusively British English and is used
in mathematics and the game of Noughts and
Crosses (Tic Tac Toe in American English!).
British English also uses zero in mathematics.
5 Go round the class asking individual students
to read out each number and elicit which
number has several different pronunciations.
7
Play the recording for students to write
the numbers.
2.21
MA Weaker students may need to hear the
sequence more than once.
26
Introduction
Answers
1 They are Fibonacci numbers.
2 The next ten numbers would be: 377,
610, 987, 1,597, 2,584, 4,181, 6,765,
10,946, 17,711, 28,657.
Transcript
0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, 144, 233
Background note
The Fibonacci sequence is produced by
starting with 0 and 1 (or 1 and 1 in some
cases), then adding the last two numbers
to form the next number in the sequence.
It is named after the Italian mathematician
Leonardo Fibonacci. He was born Leonardo
Bonacci in around 1170 in Pisa, and
his 1202 book Liber Abaci introduced
the sequence to Western mathematics,
although it had been known in Indian
mathematics for some time.
Fibonacci numbers are connected with the
golden ratio (The ‘golden ratio’ is a special
number found by dividing a line into two
parts so that the longer part divided by
the smaller part is also equal to the whole
length divided by the longer part. It is
1.618, represented by the Greek letter phi
(ɸ). Many artists, including Le Corbusier
and Dalí, use the golden ratio in their
works, as it is thought to be aesthetically
pleasing. It also appears in biological
contexts, such as branching in trees, the
fruit sprouts of a pineapple, an uncurling
fern and the arrangement of a pine cone’s
‘scales’.
Fibonacci numbers are used in mathematics
to solve a variety of problems.
Extra idea: If students are mathematically
inclined, they can find out more about
Fibonacci numbers and their uses. Students
with an interest in art could find out more
about the golden ratio.
8
THINK Write the numbers on the board;
students guess what they might refer to.
Encourage students to suggest different things
for each number.
Suggested answers
007
James Bond’s agent number
5
number of Great Lakes /
weekdays
12
number of months in a year /
Western zodiac signs / Chinese
zodiac signs
26
number of letters in the
English alphabet / weeks in
half a year
101
number of dalmatians (in
Dodie Smith’s novel and the
Disney films)
366
number of days in a leap year
1,000
number of years in a
millennium / metres in a
kilometre / grams in a kilogram
86,400
number of seconds in a day
31,536,000 number of seconds in a year
Culture notes
• James Bond’s code number, 007,
indicates that he is the seventh agent
with a licence to kill (shown by the 00
prefix). It has also been speculated that
the number comes from the ISD code
for Russia, where Bond went on an early
assignment. In the 1995 film GoldenEye,
a former 00 agent, 006, was played by
Sean Bean.
• The Great Lakes lie on the US / Canada
border and consist of Lakes Superior,
Michigan, Huron, Erie and Ontario. They
form the largest group of freshwater
lakes on Earth, containing 21% of the
world’s surface fresh water. Lake Superior
is the second largest lake in the world,
with only the Caspian Sea being bigger.
• The Western zodiac signs are Aries,
Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, Leo, Virgo, Libra,
Scorpio, Sagittarius, Capricorn, Aquarius
and Pisces.
• The Chinese zodiac signs are Rat, Ox,
Tiger, Rabbit, Dragon, Snake, Horse,
Goat, Monkey, Rooster, Dog and Pig.
• Dodie Smith (1896–1990) wrote The
Hundred and One Dalmatians (also
known as The Great Dog Robbery) in
1956. It was made into an animated
film by Disney in 1961, and a live-action
version starring Glenn Close as Cruella de
Vil was produced in 1996.
Introduction
27
•
Leap years occur every four years in the
Gregorian calendar and were originally
introduced in Roman times to keep the
calendar year synchronised with the
seasonal year, because it actually takes
the Earth 365.25 days to orbit the sun.
In a leap year, an extra day – the 29th
– is added to February. In Britain and
Ireland, women can traditionally propose
marriage in a leap year.
9 Students discuss the symbols in pairs; get
feedback as a class.
Answers
+ plus (in mathematical equations and as
a short form of and in notes)
– minus (in mathematical equations)
= equals (in mathematical equations)
@ at (in email addresses)
. dot (in email addresses and websites)
full stop (in British English punctuation)
period (in American English
punctuation)
point (in decimal numbers)
, comma (in punctuation)
? question mark (in punctuation)
( ) brackets (in punctuation); also known
as round brackets and parentheses
% per cent / percent (with figures)
˚ degree(s) (with temperatures)
10 Students work in pairs and decide how each
item should be read out. Five pairs give their
answers to the class; the other students should
confirm or correct.
Answers
1 zero / nought degrees centigrade / Celsius
2 three point one four one five nine two
3 Does two plus two equal five?
4 lots of information at jetmail dot com
5 a / one hundred per cent
Extra idea: Ask students what items 1 and
2 in 10 represent.
Answers
1 The temperature at which water
freezes.
2 Phi (ɸ) to six decimal places
28
Introduction
Years and dates review
11 Students work in pairs or small groups to work
out the pronunciation of the years and answer
the questions.
Answers
2016 twenty sixteen / two thousand and
sixteen
2014 twenty fourteen / two thousand and
fourteen
2001 two thousand and one
2000 two thousand
1999 nineteen ninety-nine
1998 nineteen ninety-eight
1812 eighteen twelve
1600 sixteen hundred
357 three hundred and fifty-seven
1 Yes; years from 2010 onwards can be
said as either two two-digit numbers or
a four-digit number. The latter format
was used for years 2001–2009, but the
former is now becoming more prevalent
for years 2010 onwards.
2 a) 2016, 2000, 1900
b) 2014, 1998
c) 2016, 2000
Background notes
• The 1900 Olympics were held in Paris,
France; the 2000 Olympics were held
in Sydney, Australia and the 2016
Olympics are in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.
(There were Winter Olympics held in
1998 in Nagano, Japan, and in 2014 in
Sochi, Russia.)
• The 1998 FIFA World Cup was played
in France; France beat Brazil 3–0. The
2014 FIFA World Cup was played in
Brazil; Germany beat Argentina 1–0.
• Students may have counted 1900 as
a leap year, but it’s not. To calculate a
leap year, ask:
– Is the year divisible by 4?
No: It’s not a leap year.
Yes: Go to next question.
– Is the year divisible by 100?
No: It’s a leap year.
Yes: Go to next question.
– Is the year divisible by 400?
No: It’s not a leap year.
Yes: It’s a leap year.
in East Germany going to the West, but in
1989 a series of radical political changes
in the Eastern Bloc occurred, culminating
in the announcement that citizens in
the East could visit West Germany and
West Berlin. Within days, people were
chipping away at the Wall, carrying away
chunks of it as souvenirs. It actually took
three years to complete the demolition
of the Wall, but it paved the way for
German reunification, which was formally
concluded on October 3rd, 1990.
Extra idea: Ask students if the years mean
anything special to them. They can think
of general responses (eg 1812 was the
year of Napoleon’s attempted invasion of
Russia, commemorated by Tchaikovsky’s
famous overture; 2001 was in the title of
a film 2001: A Space Odyssey) or personal
responses, such as the year of birth of a
family member.
12 Ask four students to read out the dates and
ask the class if they know what happened on
them. They can use the clues to help them
guess.
•
The first Harry Potter book was Harry
Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone,
written by JK Rowling in an Edinburgh
café after getting the inspiration for the
story during a train journey. The book and
its six sequels became hugely popular with
children and adults alike, and spawned a
series of eight films, which brought the
students of Hogwarts to the big screen
in one of the most successful movie
franchises of all time.
•
Amy Winehouse (1983–2011) was a
British singer-songwriter who became
known as much for her bouffant hair and
dark eye make-up as for her soulful voice.
She started as a jazz singer, but her style
later encompassed elements of pop, soul
and R&B. Her 2006 album Back to Black
won five Grammy awards, and she had
hit singles with Rehab, Back to Black, Love
is a Losing Game and Valerie. She won
many other awards for her music before
her tragically premature death from
accidental alcohol poisoning.
Answers
July 21st, 1969
The first man walked on
the moon.
th
9 Nov, 1989 The Berlin Wall came
down.
th
26 June, 1997 The first Harry Potter book
was published.
th
Oct 20 , 2003 Amy Winehouse released
her debut album.
Extra idea: Remind students that there are
two ways to say and write dates:
28th July the twenty-eighth of July
July 28th July (the) twenty-eighth
You could also remind them that Americans
tend to put the month first, so that 4/3 is
the third of April in the USA, but the fourth
of March in the UK. Write a few dates on
the board in figures for students to read
out in full.
Background notes
• The first men to land on the moon were
the crew of the American spaceflight
Apollo 11: Neil Armstrong, Buzz Aldrin
and Michael Collins. They actually landed
on the moon on July 20th, but it was the
following day when Armstrong became
the first man to set foot on the moon,
uttering the famous words ‘One small step
for man, one giant leap for mankind’.
•
The Berlin Wall was constructed in 1961
by the German Democratic Republic,
splitting the city of Berlin into East Berlin,
which belonged to the communist Eastern
Bloc, and West Berlin. It prevented people
13 Students work in pairs to say the dates and
then discuss other dates that are memorable
for them.
Answers
New Year’s Day: the first of January /
January (the) first
New Year’s Eve: the thirty-first of December /
December (the) thirty-first
Extra idea: Ask students if New Year’s
Eve is a big celebration in their country.
Do they know what it’s called in Scotland?
(Hogmanay)
Introduction
29
1
Water
UNIT
FOCUS
GRAMMAR: present perfect v past simple; infinitive of purpose; modal verbs
VOCABULARY: words connected with water; water sports and equipment
FUNCTION: asking for more information
Introduction p7
Aim
The focus of this lesson is to introduce the topic
of water by exploring vocabulary connected with
water and its uses and doing a quiz.
Warm-up
Books closed. Write the word water in the middle
of the board and ask students to think of as many
things as they can that they associate with it. Elicit
their ideas and write them on the board to make a
vocabulary network.
1 Students work in pairs to add words to the
word fountain. They can use the network they
produced in the Warm-up as a starting point.
You could also ask them to suggest a heading
for each group of words. Get feedback from
the class and add any new ideas to the board.
Suggested answers
•
•
•
•
•
•
boat, ship … ferry, yacht, canoe, kayak,
surfboard, hovercraft, jet ski …
sail, swim … ski, surf, fish, dive, scuba
dive, snorkel …
sea, river … lake, ocean, waterfall, canal,
pond, pool, stream, lagoon …
cloud, rain … snow, fog, hail, ice, mist, …
hot, dirty … cold, icy, clean, deep,
shallow, salt …
drink, shower … bath, freeze, boil, pour,
filter, save, wash …
2 In pairs, students mime things they can do with
water. Their partner tries to guess the correct
answer. Give an example, such as watering
plants, to model the activity.
3
30
THINK Before students do the quiz, you
could pre-teach words such as filter, iodine
and splash. Filter and iodine are similar in
lots of languages, so they should be easy to
understand. Try to demonstrate splash. Elicit
the meaning of words like seatbelt and sink (eg
by looking at the elements of the compound
word or from context).
Unit 1
Students do the quiz together. Get feedback
and find out which answers they knew and
which ones were surprising.
Answers
1 a) A few days (three), but also c)
(It depends on where you are, how hot
it is, what you’re doing, how old / well
you are … .)
2 a) Boil it. If you don’t, you can get ill or
have stomach problems.
3 a) Drink it. If you don’t, you may die.
4 a) Undo your seatbelt and b) open the
window. If you don’t open the window,
you won’t be able to open the door
when the car is under the water.
5 c) Salt water, because it will make you
thirstier. (It makes the cells in your body
get rid of water rather than absorb it.)
6 b) H2O. The other two are hydrogen gas
(H2) and sulphuric acid (H2SO4).
Extra idea: Use the quiz to review zero
and first conditional sentences. Write the
following on the board:
1 If you drink salt water, it makes you
thirstier.
2 If you don’t make water safe to drink,
you’ll get stomach problems.
Ask these questions:
• How many parts to each sentence are
there? (two)
• How do we know? (They’re separated
by a comma.)
• What has to happen first? (the action in
the if clause)
• What is the other part of the sentence?
(the result)
• Are these things possible? (yes)
• Which one is more likely? (sentence 1)
• Will salt water definitely make you
thirstier? (yes)
• How do you know? (It’s a fact.)
• Will you always get stomach problems
if you don’t boil water? (not always)
• Is it likely? (yes, very likely)
Tip: Let students think about the quiz
questions on their own for a few
moments, then, to encourage interaction,
they can ask each other the questions
and circle their partner’s responses.
4
Reading
1 Students look at the photos, describe what
they see and guess the connections. Get
feedback and check their ideas.
2
PREDICT When you see PREDICT in front
of an instruction, it means students should
make predictions about what they are about
to read or listen to based on information on
the page. For more information about these
exercises, see the Introduction, page 13. Write
the title of the text on the board (He did it first)
and ask students to guess what the man did.
You could also write sentence starters on the
board to help them make predictions (Maybe
he ... , Perhaps he ...).
Give students a very short time (eg 30 seconds)
to scan the text and find the answer to the
question (He was the first person to swim
the length of the Amazon.). They then read it
again more slowly to get the detail.
3
This symbol shows that this is a memory
game – the first of many in the book. Memory
is an important part of learning anything, and
the more we exercise our memory by playing
these kinds of game the better it will be.
Put students in pairs to try to remember the
answers to the questions without looking at
the text. They then read it again to check their
answers.
Students listen to and read the
rhyme. They then guess what happened to
the technician (He drank or bathed in what
he thought was water (H2O) but was really
sulphuric acid (H2SO4), which killed him.).
1.4
Extra idea: Ask one or two students to
read the rhyme aloud, copying the rhythm
and intonation of the recording.
5
FINISH IT Write the sentences starters The
most disgusting thing I’ve ever drunk is ... The
most delicious thing I’ve ever drunk is ... on
the board. Students complete the sentences
with their own experiences, compare with
a partner and then walk around the room
asking each other What’s the most disgusting /
delicious thing you’ve ever drunk?. Get class
feedback. Were any students able to find two
other people with the same answers?
Lesson 1 A very long way!
pp8–9
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to compare the use
of the present perfect and past simple, and to
practise using the infinitive of purpose.
You first!
There are You first! boxes at the beginning of
many lessons in the Student’s Book. They have
three goals: firstly, to engage students and get
them saying something immediately; secondly, to
allow students to use what they already know and
boost their confidence; and thirdly, to give you
an idea of what they already know so that you
can target your teaching much more effectively.
Students can say as much or as little as they want.
For this one, students look at the background
photo and discuss the question with a partner.
Ask if they would swim a river like this and elicit
their reasons and ideas about possible delights,
difficulties and dangers. Ask them which river they
think it is (the Amazon).
Answers
1 To draw people’s attention to water
problems around the globe
2 Five rivers are mentioned in the text:
the Mississippi, the Paraná, the Yangtze,
the Colorado and the Amazon.
3 The Amazon is the longest river, at
5,430km.
4 The Mississippi
5 It starts in Peru and reaches the sea in
Brazil.
Extra idea: Show the trailer of the
film documentary about Martin Strel,
which won the Sundance Film Festival
in 2009 (https://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=ce432_JmdB8).
Put students in pairs and give each pair
a set of sentence fragments (see below).
Students try to put the sentence fragments
Unit 1
31
in the correct order (the fragments are
shown in the correct order below). They
then watch the trailer again and check.
Show the trailer a third time if necessary
and check together as a class.
There is a man
who has swum the world’s deadliest rivers,
who laughs in the face of crocodiles,
piranhas,
and giant anacondas;
a man who drinks two bottles of wine a
day,
a man who has braved the Yangtze,
the Mississippi,
the Danube,
and who will now do battle with
the mighty Amazon.
His mission –
to save the world
before it is destroyed.
His name is Martin Strel,
but you can call him
Big River Man.
4
THINK Students discuss the questions in
pairs. Check ideas with the whole class.
Answers
1 The USA (the Mississippi, the Colorado),
Argentina (the Paraná), Paraguay (the
Paraná), China (the Yangtze), Peru
(the Amazon), Brazil (the Paraná, the
Amazon), Colombia (the Amazon)
2 The Amazon is very polluted and is
home to many dangerous animals:
piranha, crocodiles, snakes, candirú,
insects, etc. He also had to contend
with sunburn and bandits.
3 A crew in a boat which provided
food, water and a place to sleep; a
cameraman.
32
Unit 1
Extra ideas: Encourage students to look
online for more information or create a
web quest. Give the class links to two
or three websites for them to answer
comprehension questions about Martin.
Slovenian completes Amazon swim
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/
americas/6536283.stm#amazon
Martin Strel: Swimming the Amazon
http://content.time.com/time/arts/
article/0,8599,1920907,00.html
Piranhas, Sunburn Can’t Stop 3,272Mile Swim
http://abcnews.go.com/WNT/ESPNSports/
story?id=3021041
Students read the text again and find
words or phrases that mean:
1 having strong feelings and emotions
2 get people to notice
3 the world
4 something very good and difficult that
you succeed in
5 knowledge or understanding of
something
6 damage caused to the environment
7 a film that gives facts and information
about a subject
Answers: 1 passionate, 2 draw attention
to, 3 the globe, 4 achievement,
5 awareness, 6 pollution, 7 documentary
Grammar 1 Present perfect v past simple
5 Students work in pairs and discuss the
differences between the present perfect and
the past simple. You could also ask questions
to make sure they notice the difference:
•
•
•
•
•
When did he swim the Colorado? (in 2011)
Is it still happening, or is it a completed
action? (a completed action)
What tense do we use to describe
completed actions in the past? (past simple)
Could he swim other long rivers in the
future? (yes)
What tense do we use to refer to repeated
actions in the past that could continue in
the future? (present perfect)
6 Students complete the sentences with has or
did and the correct verb, and compare with
a partner. Check as a class and ask students
which tense is used in each sentence and why.
Answers
1 How long has Strel been passionate
about clean water? (present perfect)
2 What year did he swim the Amazon?
(past simple)
3 Where did he start his journey? (past
simple)
4 Where did he finish it? (past simple)
5 How many rivers has he swum up to
now? (present perfect)
6 Has he ever swum the Nile? (present
perfect)
7 Students ask and answer the questions in pairs.
Answers
1 He has been passionate about clean
water for many years.
2 He swam the Amazon in 2007.
3 He started his journey in Atalaya in
Peru.
4 He finished his journey in Belém in
Brazil.
5 He has swum five of the longest rivers
up to now. (He has also swum the
Danube and the Thames.)
6 No, he hasn’t ever swum the Nile.
Tip: Repeat the answers to the questions
together and encourage students to
notice natural features of pronunciation
such as contractions and weak forms.
You could highlight them in phonemic
script on the board:
He has been passionate ...
/hiː hæz biːn ˈpæʃənət/ – /hɪzbɪnˈpæʃənət/
He has swum ...
/hiː hæz swʌm/ – /hɪz swʌm/
Grammar 2 Infinitive of purpose
8 Students complete the grammar table. They
can look back at the text to help them if
necessary. Ask the following questions and
highlight the different sections of the sentence
to check students’ understanding.
What did Strel do? (He swam the Amazon.)
Why did he do it? (in order to raise
awareness of water pollution)
• What kind of word is ‘to raise’? (infinitive)
• What does it tell us? (the reason why we
do things)
• Where does ‘not’ go in the negative form?
(between order and to)
You could also explain that we can just use the
infinitive instead (He swam the Amazon
in order to raise awareness). This structure
is more common and less formal than in
order to.
•
•
Answers
a) Strel swam the Amazon in order to
raise awareness of water pollution.
b) In order not to get sunburnt, he often
wore a mask over his face.
1 The infinitive
2 By adding not after order
Speaking
9 Students discuss the questions in pairs. Get
feedback to check their ideas and predictions,
and that they’re using the infinitive of purpose
to express their answers in question 2.
Answer
3 Both activities are about raising awareness
of issues.
10 Quickly check that students know the meaning
of words in the text such as viral, degenerative
and afflicts. Students then read the text
and find out why people did the Ice Bucket
Challenge and if it was successful.
Answer
They did it in order to raise money for
charity and to increase awareness of ALS
(MND). It was a huge success and raised
millions of pounds.
Unit 1
33
Background information
To do the Ice Bucket Challenge, people had
to record a video of themselves pouring icy
water over their heads. Then the participant
could nominate three other people to do
the challenge, often within a set period
of time. Pop stars like Justin Bieber, sports
personalities like Roger Federer, and former
US Presidents George W. Bush and Bill
Clinton did the challenge!
The Ice Bucket Challenge was very
successful, and people shared more
than 2.4 million videos on Facebook and
tweeted more than 2.2 million times on
Twitter. In the United States, people did
the challenge for the ALS Association and
raised over $100 million. In the UK, people
participated for the Motor Neurone Disease
Association, the UK equivalent of the ALS
Association, and raised over £7 million.
11 YOUR STORY When you see
YOUR STORY in front of an instruction, it
indicates that students have an opportunity to
personalise the language by talking about a
situation that they’ve been in that is similar to
the one they’ve just read about or listened to.
For more information about these exercises,
see the Introduction, page 16.
Students discuss the questions in pairs, then
report their experiences in feedback. You could
also ask extra questions:
Can you suggest any problems with doing the
Ice Bucket Challenge? (Some people said it
was a waste of water, that it was bad for your
health.) What could you do in order to avoid
these problems? (Pour the same bucket of ice
and water over more than one person at the
same time, use water that has already been
used for something else, eg bathing.)
12 TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE Ask students if
they can remember other things that went viral
(eg men putting nail polish on one fingernail).
Which things did they like best? Have any of
them done the Ice Bucket Challenge, or liked /
commented on a related online post?
Extra idea: Students read the information
again and make a list of social networking
language (post a video, go viral, upload,
comment, like, a post).
34
Unit 1
13
Students listen to the conversation and
answer the questions. Play the recording again
if necessary, then ask for feedback and find
out students’ opinions about the solutions. Ask
them if they know how many people around
the world don’t have clean water (nearly 800
million people).
1.5
Answer
1 People used seawater and toilet water
instead.
Transcript
man
Did you see all those people doing the
Ice Bucket Challenge last summer?
woman Yes, I read about it. Amazing, wasn’t
it?
man
Yes, it was, but I wouldn’t ever do
anything like that.
woman Why not?
man
Such a waste of water. Do you have
any idea how many people in the
world don’t have good, clean water?
And these people were throwing it
over their head!
woman I don’t think everyone wasted clean
water. A friend of mine used sea water
in order not to use fresh water, and
I know several other people who did
the same.
man
Oh, that’s clever.
woman Yes, and the American actor, Matt
Damon, filmed himself using toilet
water.
man
Really? Because he didn’t want to
waste water?
woman Yes, exactly – because he’s a cofounder of a water charity, Water.org,
and he wanted to make the point
that the water in toilets in the West is
actually cleaner than the water that
most people in the developing world
have for cooking and drinking.
EXPLORE ONLINE
The Explore online exercises give students the
opportunity to go beyond the page and find
out more about some aspect of the topic for
themselves, on their computer, smartphone or
other mobile device. The online research can be
done individually, or in pairs or groups, either in
the classroom or at home. If it’s done at home,
you can set it up in the classroom beforehand
by suggesting possible websites or by eliciting
suggestions for words and phrases to type into the
search engine.
Tip: Students often enjoy using their
smartphones to search for things
online, so encourage them to find out
information on the internet. It gives
them extra reading practice in English,
but it’s OK if they read in their mother
tongue, as it gets them to translate!
14 VIDEO OPTION When you see
VIDEO OPTION in front of an instruction,
it gives students the chance to make a short
film on their smartphones using the language
and topic they’ve been studying. For more
information about these exercises, see the
Introduction, page 14.
Answer
The writer is against bottled water.
Tip: Setting a short time limit encourages
students to read quickly for gist and
not to worry too much about unknown
vocabulary or look up words in
dictionaries. Explain that they don’t need
to know the meaning of every word to
understand the general meaning and
complete the task. It also makes the
reading more focused ... and fun!
2 Students work with a partner and write down
reasons for the writer’s opinion. There are more
than five reasons in the article, so it shouldn’t
be difficult for them to complete this task.
Answers
Bottled water isn’t healthier.
It can have more bacteria than tap water.
It’s bad environmentally.
It’s expensive to transport.
You have to keep it in a fridge.
The plastic bottles are hard to get rid of.
If we didn’t spend so much on bottled water,
we could invest more on water projects.
Encourage students to think of other challenge
ideas for their video presentations. They then
walk around the room and share their ideas
with each other. Get feedback and have them
vote on the best / most difficult / silliest /
funniest challenges.
Lesson 2 Tap or bottled?
pp10–11
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to review the function
and meaning of modal verbs for making
suggestions and for expressing ability, obligation
and prohibition. The vocabulary is related to the
environment, and students also discuss ways of
conserving water.
You first!
Ask students how far they have to go to get water,
and if they know anyone who has to travel far
to get water (to make the point that we’re really
lucky to have it ‘on tap’, while many people have
to walk miles). You could also ask extra questions
(Do you prefer tap water or bottled water? How
much water do you drink each day?).
Reading
1 Give students five minutes to read the article
and find the writer’s opinion on bottled water.
3
When you see this icon with a vocabulary
exercise, it means that you should ask students
which words are the same as or similar to
words in their own language – and also which
are very different. For more information about
these exercises, see the Introduction, page 15.
Students work in pairs and match the words
and phrases in green in the article with their
correct meaning. Do the first one with the class
as an example. Ask students which words are
very similar in their own language and which
are very different.
Answers
1 proper 2 experiments 3 landfill sites
4 bacteria 5 vital 6 wells 7 lack
4 Students discuss the overall message of the
article. They should give reasons for their
choice.
Unit 1
35
Answer
c) use our money to help provide safe
water worldwide
Answers
5 Students decide if the statements are true or
false and correct the false statements.
7 Students work in pairs to discuss and then
match the modals with their meanings. As a
follow-up, students think of sentences using
the modal verbs in context.
36
Unit 1
can’t
It is
advisable
ought to,
should
It isn’t
advisable
oughtn’t to,
shouldn’t
It isn’t
necessary
don’t have
to
Extra idea: Write (or project) words
scattered across the board (example
below). Students work in pairs to quickly
arrange the words to make a sentence
(eg Jane is a flight attendant so she has to
wear a uniform). The first team to shout
out a correct answer wins a point. The
team with the most points at the end wins
the game. Try to include as many different
modal verbs in context as possible.
uniform
Grammar Modal verbs
Tip: Students often have difficulties with modal
verbs, so look out for typical mistakes,
such as using an infinitive after the modal
verb (We should to drink around two litres
a day) and use of mustn’t to show lack of
obligation (It’s Saturday, so I mustn’t don’t
have to go to school).
It isn’t
possible
It is
mustn’t
prohibited
Tip: Asking students to choose four out of the
six statements is a useful tool for helping
students to feel more in control of their
learning. They still have to read all six
statements in order to make their choice.
Answer
We ought to / should drink around two
litres a day.
can
It is
have to,
necessary must
Answers
1 False (Bottled water is much more
expensive than tap water.)
2 True
3 False (It is not mentioned in the article.)
4 True
5 True
6 True
6 Students complete the sentence and check
the meaning with a partner. Get feedback and
check students understand the function and
form:
• When we say ‘ought to’, do we have to do
it? (No, it’s advice, even though it’s quite
bossy!)
• Which modal verb has the same meaning?
(should)
It is
possible
wear
8
flight attendant
has to
Jane
a
is
so
a
she
SEARCH AND THINK When you see
SEARCH AND THINK in front of an
instruction in a grammar or vocabulary
exercise, it indicates that students need to go
back through a reading text or transcript to
find particular examples of language. For more
information about these exercises, see the
Introduction, page 11.
Students search for the missing modals in
pairs. To make the activity quick and enjoyable,
tell them it’s a race. The first team to finish
with the correct answers wins the game.
Answers
Modals not in article: shouldn’t, oughtn’t
to, don’t have to, mustn’t.
9 Students complete the sentences with an
appropriate modal verb. Go over the example
with them first to check that they understand
that both sentences should mean the same.
Check answers in feedback and correct if
necessary.
Answers
1 We ought to drink about two litres of
water a day.
2 We don’t have to drink bottled water.
3 Bottled water can have high levels of
bacteria.
4 Perhaps we should stop buying bottled
water.
5 Girls have to walk a long way to fetch
water.
Tip: Do some repetition drilling and help
students notice how the pronunciation of
modal verbs changes in connected speech
because of weak forms and elision (sounds
we drop when we speak quickly).
We can drink – /kæn/ – /kən/
We have to walk – /hæv tuː/ – /hæf tə/
We must go – /mʌst / – /mʌs/
Speaking and writing
10 THINK Write the following on the board:
You should / could take a shower instead of a
bath.
Elicit which modal is ‘softer’ and more polite
(could). Explain that should is a bit bossy and is
more likely to be rejected.
Students make a list of things we can do to
save water. You might need to teach words
like flush and load, but they’ll probably ask for
these in the course of the activity.
Feed back as a class and make a composite list
on the board.
MA Weaker students can work in pairs to
write their lists.
Suggested answers
Spend less time in the shower (will also
save on hot-water bills).
Use less water in the bath (will also save on
hot-water bills).
Don’t flush the toilet every single time.
Don’t leave the tap running while you
brush your teeth.
Make sure the washing machine (or
dishwasher) is fully loaded each time you
use it.
Water the garden less.
Collect rainwater for watering the garden.
11 Students complete the email giving advice
and helpful suggestions for saving water. They
can refer to the composite list from 10, but
encourage them to be creative and funny.
When they’ve finished, ask a few students to
read their emails to the class and vote for the
most creative / funniest / silliest ideas!
EXPLORE ONLINE
Students could find out about waste in general,
not just water waste. As a follow-up, students
work in pairs to think of ways to prevent
unnecessary waste and help the environment.
Lesson 3 Water activities
pp12–13
Aims
In this lesson, students learn vocabulary related to
water sports and equipment and discuss their own
favourite hobbies and activities. This provides a
nice context for practising the present perfect and
past simple. The listening section includes plenty
of modal verbs for giving advice and suggestions,
and the Song Link focuses on words and phrases
connected with the passing of time.
You first!
Students work in pairs to choose one of the
photos in the lesson that they like and say why.
Write extra questions on the board to encourage
more speaking:
Have you ever done this activity before?
Where were you?
Did you enjoy it?
Would you like to do the activity in future?
Tip: Walking around the room, listening and
noting any good sentences and mistakes
you hear, is a good way of gaining an
insight into things you might need to
practise and review. It also offers ideas
for future lessons and enables you to
highlight good language to the rest of
the class in feedback.
Extra idea: Write the names of different
water sports on the board in phonemic
script. Put students in pairs to guess the
words. The first team to shout out the
correct answer wins a point. The team with
the most points at the end wins.
Unit 1
37
/ˈækwə ˌwɔːkɪŋ/ (aqua walking)
/kəˈnuːɪŋ/ (canoeing)
/ˈdaɪvɪŋ/ (diving)
/ˈkaɪækɪŋ/ (kayaking)
/ˈkaɪt ˌsɜːfɪŋ/ (kite surfing)
/ˈpædl ˈbɔːdɪŋ/ (paddle boarding)
/ˈseɪlɪŋ/ (sailing)
/ˈskuːbə ˌdaɪvɪŋ/ (scuba diving)
/ˈsnɔːkəlɪŋ/ (snorkelling)
/ˈswɪmɪŋ/ (swimming)
/ˈwɪndˌsɜːfɪŋ/ (windsurfing)
Vocabulary Water sports and equipment
1
Listening 1
5 Students identify the sports in photos 2 and 6
(aqua walking and paddle boarding). Ask them
if they’ve come across these sports before, and
if anyone has tried them. Students should use
guesswork and the photos to select and order
the instructions for each sport.
MA Tell weaker students that there are four
instructions for each sport.
Students match the words with the photos
and identify any words that don’t belong in
the list. If they can think of any other water
sports, write them on the board too (eg jet
skiing, water skiing, water polo, synchronised
swimming). Ask students which words are very
similar in their own language and which are
very different.
Answers
1 canoeing 2 aqua walking
3 kitesurfing 4 diving / scuba diving
5 sailing 6 paddle boarding
7 snorkelling 8 kayaking 9 windsurfing
Students will probably say that ironing does
not belong in the list because it’s not a
water sport. However, underwater ironing
is possible, although it is not pictured!
2 Students discuss the questions in pairs. After a
while, change pairs so they can compare their
ideas with someone else.
3 To model the activity, tell students about a
water sport or activity you’ve done. They then
discuss the questions with a partner. You may
need to supply vocabulary for the equipment
required. Conduct whole-class feedback to
find out the most popular water sports and get
extra information about activities students have
done.
4 Students can also find additional water sports
and activities online. It’s actually quite hard
to find anything that isn’t done underwater!
An internet search will reveal people play
ping-pong, tennis, chess, hockey, rugby,
football, volleyball, golf, ice hockey and bingo
underwater, not to mention cycling and ice
skating!
38
Extra idea: Have a competition to see
who can find the most unusual underwater
activity.
Unit 1
Answers
Paddle boarding: h, a, c, e
Aqua walking: f, g, b, d
Sentence f assumes the aqua walking is
taking place in the sea (as in photo 2) and
therefore requires a wetsuit, though many
people do it in a swimming pool and don’t
need a wetsuit!
6
Play the recording for students to check
their answers to 5. They then compare with
a partner. To review, students note down the
modal verbs in the recording (should, will,
can’t, must, mustn’t, can).
1.6
MA With weaker classes, play the first extract
and check answers before continuing with the
second.
Answer
Lesson 1: aqua walking
Lesson 2: paddle boarding
Transcript
1
instructor
group
instructor
OK, good morning, everyone!
Morning!
And welcome to your first aqua
walking class! I’d just like to check
that you all have everything you
need. You should wear a wetsuit,
boots, gloves and even a hat if
the water’s very cold. And it is!
Very cold! So does everyone have
everything they need? We have
some spare hats and gloves if
anybody needs them.
group
instructor
woman
instructor
instructor
group
instructor
I don’t have gloves! / I’d like a hat! /
No, I’m fine.
Wearing a floatation belt around
your waist will help keep your chest
above water. Would anybody like
one?
Yes, please! I can’t swim.
Here you are. OK, off you go and
change. See you down on the
beach.
***
OK. Everybody here? Let’s all walk
into the sea. It’s nice and calm
today, luckily. We’re going to start
in shallow, waist-high water and
gradually move to deeper, shoulderhigh water. Move forwards
naturally: place your heel, then your
toe. Don’t walk on tiptoe! That’s
right. Now, are you ready to do
some exercises?
Yes! / No!
OK. Let’s do some running on the
spot!
Tip: Try a TPR (total physical response) game
to check students know words such as
knees bent, back straight, on tiptoe,
kneel, etc. This is fun, gets students
moving around and active after a
long time seated, and checks their
understanding in a really visual way.
7 Close books. Play the recording again for
students to write down what the instructor
says for each thing. They then compare with a
partner.
Answers
a life jacket: Paddle boards are classified
as boats, so you have to wear a life jacket.
standing up: If it’s too difficult to stand
up, you can kneel and learn to paddleboard on your knees at the beginning.
your hips: Use your hips to balance.
the front of the board: The front of the
board should be in the water, not up in
the air.
2
instructor
woman
instructor
woman
instructor
woman
instructor
woman
instructor
woman
First of all, you must put on this life
jacket.
A life jacket? Really? Why?
Because paddle boards are
classified as boats, so you have to
wear a life jacket.
As boats?! Oh, OK.
OK. To get on, first kneel just
behind the centre of the board,
then stand up. If it’s too difficult to
stand up, you can kneel and learn
to paddle-board on your knees at
the beginning.
No, I want to stand up.
You’re up. Great. So your feet
should be parallel, your knees
bent and your back straight. That’s
right. Use your hips to balance. The
front of the board should be in the
water, not up in the air. Good. You
mustn’t look down. Always look
straight ahead at the horizon.
What do I do with the paddle?
Hold the paddle with both hands:
one at the top, one lower down.
Excellent. Well done. The water’s
nice and calm. Off you go!
Byee!
Extra idea: Develop body vocabulary by
asking students to look at the photos in
this lesson. Which parts of the body /
muscles are important for each of the
activities?
8
Close books. Students write down the
parts of the body that were mentioned, then
compare in pairs to see who remembered
the most. Check answers either by allowing
students to reread the instructions in 5 or by
playing the recording again.
Answers
feet, knees, back, waist, shoulder, hand,
heel, toe, chest, hip
9
EVERYBODY UP! Students work in small
groups and take turns to demonstrate and
describe the position. Play the audio again if
necessary. They could also play Simon says with
the paddle-boarding instructions. Model the
activity so they know what to do. They then
take turns giving instructions in pairs. They can
only do the actions if their partner says Simon
says ...!
Unit 1
39
Listening 2
10
instructor
Pre-teach words like workout,
impact, rehabilitation, resistant, stamina and
socialising. Play the recording, pausing it at key
points for students to guess the activity. When
they’ve guessed correctly, ask them which
words enabled them to work it out.
1.7
man
instructor
man
instructor
Answers
The sport is aqua walking.
Transcript
man
So, tell me a little bit about this
activity. It doesn’t look wildly
exciting. What are the benefits?
instructor It’s actually a wonderful workout
for your whole body. You can use
it to strengthen your muscles and
joints in a very safe way. The water
supports your weight, so there’s no
impact or stress on your muscles or
joints. You can’t hurt yourself.
man
So you can use it for helping people
with injuries?
instructor Yes, it is good for people with
injuries – injured sportspeople often
use it for rehabilitation – but it’s
good for everybody else too, and
many athletes use it as part of their
training.
man
I read somewhere that if you’re
in shoulder-deep water, you only
weigh ten per cent of what you
weigh on land. Is that right?
instructor Yes, exactly. So there’s no danger.
But you have to work much harder
because water is 12 times as
resistant as air. So you can do it in
order to build up your stamina, and
it’s terrific for your heart. It can also
help you lose weight.
man
Really?
instructor Yes, you burn 100 more calories for
every half hour walking or jogging
in water than when you do those
same activities on land.
man
I didn’t know that. And what kinds
of things do you do in a session?
Just walk around in the swimming
pool? Sounds a bit unexciting.
40
Unit 1
man
No, not a swimming pool. A lot of
people do it in a pool, but round
here, we do it in the sea.
Whatever the weather?
Whatever the weather!
Goodness, you’re brave. It can be
freezing!
Well, it’s more interesting than
being in a swimming pool. And
we don’t just walk around, and we
don’t just walk forwards. We walk
on the spot and we walk backwards
and sideways. And we run as
well as walk. And we do cycling
movements and leg exercises.
And we exercise our arms, too –
often with weights – so all kinds
of exciting things. It’s actually lots
of fun. And it’s a great activity for
socialising. You should try it!
Hmm. I might do one day.
Extra idea: There are four additional parts
of the body mentioned in the recording.
Ask students if they can identify them
(muscles, joints, heart, arms).
11
Students answer the questions. Do the first
one together as an example. Then play the
recording again for them to check.
MA Students can answer the questions in
pairs, then join with another pair to check
answers.
Answers
1 You can use it to strengthen your
muscles and joints in a very safe way.
2 The water supports your weight, so
there’s no impact or stress on your
muscles or joints.
3 It’s good for athletes and people with
injuries.
4 They walk, run, do cycling movements,
leg exercises and arm exercises with
weights.
5 It’s unlikely. He uses the word might, but
his intonation suggests that he’s not keen
on the idea.
12 Students discuss together in pairs. Check their
ideas and opinions in whole-class feedback.
13 MINI-TALK When you see MINI-TALK
in front of an instruction, this is a chance
to get students talking and writing more.
However, giving a talk to the whole class can
be intimidating, so if they prefer, they can just
do it for a small group. For more information
about these exercises, see the Introduction,
page 12.
Everyday English p14
Asking for more information
1 Students read the advert and answer the
questions, then compare with a partner.
Answers
1 It tells you the cost per day, the opening
times, what’s included and that there is
a discount available.
2 It doesn’t say what leisure facilities
are available or what the ‘light lunch’
consists of.
3 Suggested answers
What different leisure facilities /
treatments are available?
How many swimming pools are there?
Is there a sauna / hot tub / steam room?
Can I get a massage?
Is there a vegetarian lunch menu?
Give students time to read the instructions and
prepare their talk. Walk around and offer help
and useful language as needed. They then give
their presentations in small groups.
Song link
This activity could be done in class (on
smartphones or tablets) or at home. Draw
students’ attention to the fact that most of the
words ending in -ing in the lyrics (eg sitting,
morning, wasting) are rendered as -in’ to show
that the g is not pronounced in informal speech.
Answers
1 ships, bay, tide, dock
2 morning, evening, wasting time
3 waves, seagulls and other beach sounds
2
Extra idea: Write ‘word chunks’ (groups
of between two and five words) from the
song The Dock of the Bay by Otis Redding
on pieces of A4 paper. Give each student
one or two of the pieces of paper. Ask
them to stand in a circle. Play the song.
When the students hear their words, they
have to quickly raise their hand.
Culture note
(Sittin’ on) the Dock of the Bay was cowritten and recorded by Otis Redding in
1967. It is said to have been inspired by
Redding’s stay in a houseboat near San
Francisco. The song won two Grammy
awards and has been covered by many
other artists, including Glen Campbell,
Cher and Bob Dylan. The whistling on the
track was originally recorded by Redding
at the start of the song; it was later rerecorded by his bandleader, Sam Taylor, and
moved to the end.
Redding died in a plane crash shortly after
recording the song, and it became the first
posthumous number one.
Write the two headings – leisure facilities
and treatments – on the board. Students come
to the board and write the vocabulary in the
correct column. Ask them which words are
very similar in their own language and which
are very different.
Answers
leisure facilities: gym, jacuzzi, sauna,
solarium, steam room, swimming pool
treatments: facial, hot stones, manicure,
massage, pedicure
3
1.8
6 Decide whether you’re going to
use the video or simply play the audio (you
may not have the video or the necessary video
equipment). Students watch or listen to the
first part of the conversation. Play and pause as
needed.
Answer
c) Could you tell me more about it?
The receptionist replies Of course.
What would you like to know?
Unit 1
41
Transcript
receptionist
jerome
receptionist
jerome
receptionist
jerome
Good morning. Tribeca Gym and
Spa. How can I help you?
Um, yes, I passed by earlier and
had some questions. I read online
that you do a one-day leisure pass
for $30.
That’s right. Yes, we do.
I wonder if you could tell me a bit
more about it.
Of course. What would you like to
know?
Well, there are actually a few
things I’d like to know more about.
4 Students discuss which sentences are more
polite and explain their reasons. Point out the
use of modal verbs could and would and also
the use of an indirect question: I wonder if you
could tell me a bit more about it.
Answers
a) is the most direct; d) is the most polite.
1.9 This symbol shows that this exercise
5 P
focuses on pronunciation. Play the recording
for students to underline the stressed words
or syllables. Do some repetition drilling to help
with pronunciation.
Answers and transcript
a) I need some more information.
b) Please can you give me some more
information?
c) Could you tell me more about it?
d) I wonder if you could tell me a bit more
about it.
e) Would you mind giving me a bit more
detail?
Tip: You could also do some sentence-stress
drilling to show the stress in a visual way.
Tap the beat out with your hand (go
from your right to left so students see
the movement and direction of writing
on the page). Say the sentences and raise
you hand higher on stressed syllables.
42
Unit 1
6 P Students look at the example; demonstrate
the different linking techniques, ie how the
sound changes at word boundaries (could
you), how an /r/ sound links to a word
beginning with a vowel (more about) and
how similar consonants cross word boundaries
(about it). Say the words in isolation, then
linked together, then as a complete sentence.
Could you
more about
about it
/kʊd juː/
/mɔː əˈbaʊt/
/əˈbaʊt ɪt/
–
–
–
/kʊʤə/
/mɔːrəˈbaʊt/
/əˈbaʊtɪt/
/kʊd juː ˈtel miː mɔː əˈbaʊt ɪt/
/kʊʤəˈtelmɪmɔːrəˈbaʊtɪt/
You can also draw students’ attention to how
a word ending in a vowel links to a word
beginning with another vowel with a /j/ sound.
Answers
a) I need some more information.
b) Please can you give me
some more information?
c) Could you tell me more about it?
d) I wonder if you could tell me a bit
more about it.
e) Would you mind giving me a bit more
detail?
7 Students reformulate the sentences in a more
polite way using indirect questions. Make sure
they use the correct verb form (eg can changes
to could, -ing form after Would you mind ...?).
They then work in pairs to ask and answer.
Encourage them to focus on pronunciation
(sentence stress and connected speech).
MA Students can work in pairs to rewrite the
questions.
Suggested answers
1 I wonder if you could give me a lift
home.
2 Would you mind telling me what the
homework is?
3 I wonder if you could lend me your
phone.
4 Would you mind doing me a favour?
I need to borrow £1 for the lockers.
8
1.10
6 Play and pause the video / audio
as necessary.
Answers
What does that include exactly?
How much are they before the discount?
What treatments are available?
What exactly does that mean? A lettuce leaf?
Can I keep them afterwards?
Transcript
jerome
receptionist
jerome
receptionist
jerome
receptionist
jerome
receptionist
jerome
receptionist
jerome
receptionist
jerome
When it says ‘use of all leisure
facilities’, what does that include
exactly?
Well, you can use our swimming
pool, gym, sauna, steam room and
jacuzzi spa.
Oh, that’s great. And it says 20%
off all treatments. How much are
they before the discount?
Well, it depends on the treatment,
but generally speaking about $95.
Wow. That’s about £60! Expensive!
Well, it would be $75 with the
20% off.
OK, so that’s £48. Even so, that’s
quite a lot. What treatments are
available?
We have several water treatments:
mineral baths, seaweed baths,
mud baths, multi-jet baths and
all different kinds of massage:
Swedish massage, head massage,
sports massage …
Oh, lots of things! OK! Thank
you. I’m not sure what all of those
things are, but I can check online.
If not, I’ll come back and ask you.
That’s fine. You can find more
information that describes them all
in detail on our website.
Oh, great. Thanks! Just a couple
more things – it says ‘light lunch’.
What does that mean exactly? A
lettuce leaf?
It means a small salad or a
sandwich, like a wrap, and a bottle
of water or a fruit juice.
OK. A bottle of water is mineral
water, right? And, um, it says
towels, robe and slippers. Can I
keep them afterwards?
9 Students discuss the questions in pairs and try
to answer them from memory. If necessary,
allow them to watch the video or listen to
the recording again and answer the questions
together.
Answers
1 Swimming pool, gym, sauna, steam
room and jacuzzi / spa
2 Mineral baths, mud baths, seaweed
baths, Indian head massage, Thai
massage
3 Students’ own answers, but probably no!
Extra idea: Write each line of the dialogue
on a separate slip of paper. Give a set of
papers to each pair of students. Play the
video / audio again and ask pairs to put the
conversation in the correct order.
EXPLORE ONLINE
This can be done in class or at home. Students use
their smartphones or mobile devices to find out
more, then share and discuss their findings in small
groups.
Background information
• Mineral baths, also known as hot springs
or geothermal waters, involve bathing in
waters rich in minerals such as calcium,
sodium, magnesium and potassium.
• Mud baths are often found in areas
where hot spring water can combine with
volcanic ash. Bathers coat themselves in
the mineral-rich mud, which is said to be
good for detoxing the skin.
• Seaweed baths involve plastering the body
with a mix of water and seaweed. It is
said to lower stress, relieve skin conditions
such as eczema and acne, and aid the
treatment of muscle and joint problems.
• Indian head massage is based on the
Ayurvedic system of healing, practised
in India for over 1,000 years. It involves
manipulating the soft tissues of the
shoulders and scalp.
• Thai massage is one of the most
invigorating types of massage, as it works
the entire body, moving it into yogalike stretches. Therapists use many parts
of their body, not just their hands, and
sometimes even walk on you!
Unit 1
43
10 ROLE-PLAY When you see ROLE-PLAY
in front of an instruction, it indicates an
opportunity for students to act out a dialogue
or situation that they’ve just heard or seen,
often substituting their own ideas and
details. For more information about these
exercises, see the Introduction, page 17. In
pairs, students role-play a conversation similar
to that in 8, but using the details of the
Thalassotherapy Centre. They can look back
at some of the questions (eg I wonder if ...?
Would you mind ...?) to help them.
Take a break
These sections are there to help students take
a break from studying from time to time. You’ll
find a simple Take a break exercise in every unit,
usually one that’s easy to do in the classroom – but
feel free to do one at any time. For more detailed
information about the Take a break sections, see
the Introduction page 12.
This first section picks up on the unit theme
of water and advises students to drink water
throughout the day. If it’s practical, allow students
to have a quick drink of water now!
Vocabulary plus p62
Wordbuilder Nouns from verbs
1 Students work in pairs to read through the list
and find the verbs that have different noun
forms. Check as a class.
MA Give weaker students a clue by telling
them there are four verbs with different noun
forms.
Answers
begin – beginning; die – death; live – life;
lose – loss
2 Go through the examples together so that
students understand that they have to write
one sentence using the verb form and one
using the noun form for each of their chosen
words. Encourage students to use at least one
of the verbs that has a different noun form.
MA Stronger students could write sentences
for more than two words.
44
Unit 1
Wordbuilder Verbs with un3 Students look at the photo. Elicit suggestions
as to what the man is doing; encourage
students to think of words beginning with unto describe him, but allow they to be creative
at this stage.
Suggested answer
He’s unpacking a box.
4 Students work in pairs or small groups to
think of nouns that can go with each verb.
For each action, students do a quick mime to
demonstrate it. Get feedback and write ideas
on the board.
MA Pair weaker students with stronger ones to
help them.
Suggested answers
1 undo: a seatbelt, a zip, a button
2 unpack: a suitcase, a bag, a box, a crate
3 untie: a knot, a ribbon
4 unplug: the iron, the kettle, the phone
charger
5 unlock: the door, the car
6 uncork: a bottle
7 unwrap: a present, a parcel
8 unfasten: a zip, a button, a jacket,
a coat
9 unload: a van, a lorry
Extra idea: Students work in new pairs
and mime the actions for their new
partners to guess.
5 Students work in pairs to answer the
questions. Monitor and give help as required,
then get feedback as a class.
Answers
1 untie, unfasten
2 ‘Undo’ means to unfasten something
that is fastened or tied.
‘Unpack’ means to take things out of a
box or suitcase.
‘Untie’ means to unfasten a knot or
something that is tied.
‘Unplug’ means to take the plug out of
an electric socket.
‘Unlock’ means to open something that
has been closed with a key.
‘Uncork’ means to take the cork out of
something.
‘Unwrap’ means to take off the outer
layer of protective or decorative
material from something.
‘Unfasten’ means to release or open
something that is fixed or closed.
‘Unload’ means to take goods out of a
vehicle that has transported them.
3 undo – do up
unpack – pack
untie – tie (up)
unplug – plug in
unlock – lock (up)
uncork – cork / put a cork in
unwrap – wrap (up)
unfasten – fasten (up)
unload – load (up)
Focus on: could
a Elicit that sentences a–e all use the word could
for different functions; students match them.
Check answers as a class.
Answers
1c 2a 3e
Answers
say: hello, yes, no, sorry, the words,
nothing, something, a lot, goodbye
tell: the time, a story, me the news, a joke,
the truth, a lie, no one
7 Students work in pairs to tell each other a
joke or story. Monitor to ensure that jokes are
appropriate, and listen out for good ones so
you can invite students to share them with the
rest of the class. If students aren’t comfortable
with telling jokes, they can tell their partner an
anecdote about something that happened to
them recently instead.
Extra idea: When students have told their
jokes / stories, have them swap partners
and tell their original partner’s joke / story
to their new partner.
5d
b Students discuss the questions in pairs.
Answers
1 might, may
2 a) It makes the suggestion stronger
and a bit ‘bossier’.
b) It becomes a definite prediction.
c) It becomes more direct and slightly
less polite.
d) It becomes a definite deduction –
you don’t think you’re mistaken.
e) It becomes more direct and slightly
less polite.
Say and tell
6 Remind students that say and tell aren’t used
in the same way, and elicit that tell needs an
object, whereas say doesn’t. Write say and tell
on the board as column headings and invite
students to tell you which column each of the
words in the box should go in.
4b
c
Students work in pairs to make requests
and give advice. Monitor to ensure they’re
using could correctly.
Networking
8
Students complete the sentences on their
own, then ask and answer the questions in
pairs. Remind them that they may need to
change the form of some of the words. Ask
students which words are very similar in their
own language and which are very different.
Answers
1 site 2 post; timeline
3 liked; commented; uploaded
4 download 5 tweet
9 Ask students why they think abbreviations
are used so much in text messages (They are
quicker to write and they make the message
shorter.). Do they think using too many
abbreviations can be confusing? Look at
the text message together and explain any
abbreviations that students are unsure of.
They then work in pairs and write the message
in full.
Unit 1
45
Answer
Hello, Jim. Thinking about you now. How
are you? Shall we / Would you like to meet
for coffee at Carluccio’s at 4pm? Bye bye
for now. See you later. Love you lots. Mave.
10 Ask students if they know what these
abbreviations mean. If they don’t, ask them to
guess or make something up!
Answers
TBH To be honest
IDK
I don’t know
BRB Be right back
IRL
In real life
CU
See you
LOL Laughing out loud / Lots of love
Extra idea: Ask students to research other
text abbreviations in English and make up
a short quiz for their partner to do. Some
ideas for inclusion: L8R (= later), 2moro
(= tomorrow), 2 (= too, to), BTW (= by the
way), IYKWIM (= if you know what I mean),
ATB (= all the best), F2F (= face to face),
ROTFL (= rolling on the floor laughing).
11 Students write their replies. Encourage them to
use any new abbreviations they’ve researched
or invented. They then swap replies with a
partner to see if their partner can understand
the message!
46
Unit 1
2
UNIT
FOCUS
Switch on!
GRAMMAR: adverbs of frequency, used to, present perfect continuous
VOCABULARY: TV: kinds of programme and descriptions; adjectives
FUNCTIONS: TV talk; requests and responses; asking / telling people not
Introduction p15
Answers
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to introduce the topic
of TV by focusing on different genres of TV
programme. Students are also encourage to start
thinking about their TV-watching habits.
You first!
Students look at the four photos and have a
class brainstorming session about the types of
programme that they represent. (Don’t go into
too much detail with vocabulary at this stage, as
students will do this in 1.)
Pre-teach the phrase change channels, then
tell students to discuss in pairs or small groups
whether or not they would watch any of these
programme types.
1
Students match the photos and words in
the box. You could also ask extra questions
to encourage speaking and personalisation:
Which two teams are playing in photo D?
(South Africa and Portugal in the 2010 World
Cup); Has anyone ever watched ‘Modern
Family’? Who is who? (This is also a great way
of eliciting X’s brother, Y’s adopted daughter,
Z’s step-mother, etc); Do you have ‘Deal or no
deal?’ in your country? Ask students which
words are very similar in their own language
and which are very different.
Answers
A crime drama B sitcom
D sports programme
to do things
C game show
2 Ask students if they can guess the meaning
of a ‘fly on the wall’ show (a programme
where the people involved behave normally
as if they’re not being filmed) and ongoing
(continuing and happening now). In pairs,
they match the definitions with the words in
the box in 1. They could also find a pair of
opposite adjectives in the definitions
(fictional / real).
1 weather forecast 2 sitcom
3 makeover show 4 reality show
5 soap (opera) 6 documentary
Extra idea: Students work in pairs and
brainstorm other adjectives that can be
used to describe TV programmes. Check
their ideas in feedback and write the
adjectives on the board. Students could
also come to the board and write their
ideas.
Possible answers
absorbing, addictive, amazing, boring,
depressing, enthralling, exciting, factual,
fascinating, fun, funny, interesting, sad,
scary, soppy, realistic, thought-provoking,
unrealistic, uplifting
Tip: Encourage students to always write
new words and phrases down in their
vocabulary books. If they don’t have one,
encourage them to get one and look
back at new language on a regular basis
to help their vocabulary to develop.
3 Elicit the five kinds of programme in 1 that
weren’t used in 2 (cartoon, crime drama, game
show, the news, sports programme). Students
choose one of these to write a definition
for. They then work in pairs, read out their
definitions to each other and guess what kind
of programme they refer to.
MA Students write their definitions in pairs,
then join with another pair to guess the
programme types.
Unit 2
47
4
Suggested answers
Answers
Cartoon: A film using animation
techniques.
Crime drama: A serious fictional story
about criminals, police detectives, lawyers,
etc.
Sports programme: It shows us live
matches / games and commentary.
The news: It informs us about world events
as they happen.
Game show: People / celebrities play a game
(answering questions or solving a problem)
and often win a prize or some money.
watch: a film, a match, a programme,
TV, a video clip
look at: (a film), (a match), a painting,
a photo, (a programme), (TV), a video clip,
a view
Elicit or explain the difference between
drama, show and programme (Programme
is a generic term that can be used for any
TV programme, but also tends to be factual;
drama is fictional, and a show is in front of an
audience.) Use the collocations in 1 to help.
Students list the programmes under the correct
heading. Check their understanding of words
like costume drama and period drama. Ask
students which words are very similar in their
own language and which are very different.
MA Tell students that some words can go
under more than one heading.
Answers
drama: costume drama, hospital drama,
legal drama, period drama
show: cookery show, quiz show, talk show,
travel show
programme: history programme, natural
history programme, nature programme,
news programme, political programme,
travel programme
5 Students mime and guess the programmes
in pairs. Look out for the funniest and most
creative ideas, and ask those pairs to perform
their mime for the whole class.
6 Students often confuse watch and look at.
Write watch / look at something on the board
and elicit the difference between them (We
watch something that changes or develops, or
that we expect to change, not something that
stays still. We look at both.). Students decide
which of the nouns in the box can collocate
with which verbs.
48
Unit 2
Items in brackets can be used with look at, but are
more common with watch.
7 Remind students of the word fountain that
they completed in Unit 1 and explain that
a mind map is a similar concept. Copy the
diagram onto the board and elicit students’
ideas to add to it.
MA With weaker classes, you could suggest
sub-categories to help them such as:
•
•
•
•
people on screen (actors, presenters)
places to watch programmes (TV, laptop)
parts of a TV (screen, remote control)
leisure activities (watching TV, listening to
music)
8 Students choose two questions to discuss in
their groups. Do feedback as a class – is there a
common viewing pattern?
MA Encourage stronger students to answer all
five questions and have weaker ones choose
just one or two of the topics.
Extra idea: This could also be done as a
class mingle to increase learner interaction
and speaking, or as a class survey.
Tip: Keep group sizes relatively small (a
maximum of five students) to ensure that
everyone has a chance to contribute to
the discussion. If students are particularly
reticent to speak, give each student a
number of counters; each time they
contribute to the discussion, they have
to ‘spend’ one of their counters. Once
they have used them all, they can’t say
any more until everyone in the group has
spent their counters.
Lesson 1 Stories from
Scandinavia pp16–17
Answers
1 They’re black in terms of subject matter
(terrible things happening) and also
visually (the settings and the weather
are very dark).
2 They are usually strong women who
aren’t glamorous, make mistakes and
have personal problems.
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to practise adverbs of
frequency and adjectives. Students also focus
on used to to describe past habits, and in the
Speaking and writing section, they look back
nostalgically at the TV shows they watched when
they were younger.
Background note
Nordic noir is a hugely popular crime
drama genre. It is typified by series such
as The Killing and Borgen from Denmark,
and Wallander from Sweden, which have
received critical acclaim in a number of
different countries (particularly Britain,
Germany and the Netherlands) and become
cult television shows. The Nordic noir
series have received numerous awards
and nominations, including BAFTA and
International Emmy Awards.
Warm-up
To introduce the topic, tell the class about your
favourite TV series when you were young. In pairs,
ask students to discuss their favourite programmes
and genres. Get feedback and find out the most
popular series.
Reading
1
PREDICT Students look at the photos and
lesson title, then write down their predictions
and compare with a partner.
MA Show an online trailer for a Nordic noir
series such as Wallander (see http://nordicnoir.
tv, for example) to give students some ideas for
vocabulary.
2 Pre-teach potentially difficult vocabulary
such as genre (= style of TV series, cinema or
literature) and abandoned (= an empty place
people have left forever). Students read the
text and check if their predictions from 1 were
correct. Get feedback and ask what things
were interesting or surprising.
3
Extra idea: Do a word-and-colourassociation dictation with the class. Write
colours on the board. Then read a list of
words. Students listen and decide which
colour to write each word under.
Grammar Adverbs of frequency
4
SEARCH AND THINK Students underline
the adverbs of frequency in the text and
answer the remaining questions to identify the
rules in pairs. Concept-check with a scale.
Extra idea: Students sometimes have
difficulties with adverbs, so write a few
jumbled or gapped sentences on the board
for students to complete; look out for
typical mistakes, such as word-order errors,
and correct as needed.
Answers
1 people sometimes commit, There is
always a very strong woman, These
women are never glamorous, They
often have a lot, the action usually
takes place, we hardly ever see the
sun, It is always snowing
2 The adverbs come after the verb be.
They come before other verbs.
3 never, hardly ever, rarely, sometimes,
normally, often, usually, almost always,
always (This is a suggested order: hardly
ever and rarely are synonymous, as are
normally, often and usually.)
4 The infinitive with to follows the word
tend. It has the same meaning as
normally / often / usually.
THINK Students discuss the questions in
pairs, then check their ideas and opinions in
feedback.
Unit 2
49
5 Students discuss the questions in groups.
Have one or two pairs if the class does not
divide equally into threes. Remind them to
use adverbs of frequency where possible, and
keep to the time limit strictly. Find out if all
the groups managed to find three kinds of
programme for each category.
Listening
Background note
Hans Christian Andersen was born on 2
April, 1805, in Denmark. He was a writer
of plays, novels and poems, but is best
known for fairy tales. Andersen’s fairy
tales have been translated into more
than 125 languages and are popular not
just with children but across all ages.
His stories present lessons of virtue and
resilience in the face of adversity. Some
of his most famous fairy tales include The
Ugly Duckling, The Little Mermaid and
The Emperor’s New Clothes. His delightful
stories have been read by millions around
the world and have also been adapted into
hugely successful animated films and stage
productions. He died on 4 August, 1875,
in a house called ‘Rolighed’ (which means
‘calmness’), near Copenhagen.
Extra idea: Students write eight sentences
about things they think their partner does,
including adverbs of frequency (eg Paolo
never cleans his room). They then ask their
partner questions to check how many of
the sentences are correct.
MA Weaker students could just write four
or five sentences.
Vocabulary Adjectives
6 Students circle the adjectives in the text.
Extra idea: Make it into a game: set a
short time limit (eg one minute) and put
students in two or three teams. The team
that finds the most adjectives in the time
wins the game. Alternatively, teams get a
point for each adjective they find, and a
bonus point if they find an adjective that
none of the other teams has circled.
Answers
popular, pleasant, open, terrible, shocking,
strong, leading, glamorous, ordinary,
perfect, personal, good, interesting,
cold, dark, lonely, foggy, grey, empty,
abandoned, fun
7 Students write ten short sentences using the
adjectives in context. Ask a few students to
read their sentences to the class.
MA Encourage stronger students to write more
than ten; weaker students could write fewer.
Extra idea: Ask students to choose five
adjectives and make anagrams. Their
partner has to unscramble the letters
correctly.
50
Unit 2
8 Students look quickly at the photo of Hans
Christian Andersen and guess who it is. Quickly
elicit what they know about him. They then do
the true / false activity in pairs.
Answers
1 True 2 False
9
3 True
4 True
1.11 Play the recording for students to
check if their answers to 8 were correct and to
write down any other interesting information
they hear. Ask extra comprehension questions
such as:
•
•
•
•
What did Andersen’s father / mother
do? (His father was a shoemaker and his
mother was a washerwoman.)
What kinds of things did Hans’s father read
to him? (He read him Danish legends and
stories from Arabian Nights.)
Why didn’t his mother read to him? (She
couldn’t read.)
How old was Hans when he began to write
fairy tales? (He was 30 years old.)
Transcript
Once upon a time, a baby was born in Odense
in Denmark. It was the 2nd of April, 1805, and
the baby’s name was Hans – Hans Christian
Andersen. Hans was the only child in a very
poor family. His father was a shoemaker and
his mother was a washerwoman. His mother
had never learnt to read and write, because
poor people in those days didn’t usually go to
school. But his father had received a little bit of
education and so he could read, and he often
used to read to his son. He read him Danish
legends and stories from Arabian Nights. So
it was from his father that Hans discovered
literature, but it was not until years later – at
the age of 30 – that he began to write his own
fairy tales.
EXPLORE ONLINE
Do a quick class survey to find out which of the
tales students have read / seen. Find out some of
the titles in students’ own language(s).
Answers
The Ugly Duckling, The Little Mermaid,
The Snow Queen, The Emperor’s New
Clothes, The Princess and the Pea
Culture note
• The Ugly Duckling tells the story of
a cygnet raised by a family of ducks.
He is bullied and thinks himself ugly
until he finally turns into a swan and
finds his true beauty. The expression
an ugly duckling is used to describe
an unattractive child who turns into a
beautiful adult.
• The Little Mermaid is about a mermaid
who falls in love with a human prince and
sells her voice so that she can have legs
and be with him. It has spawned several
films, including a Disney animation.
• The Snow Queen is the story of Gerda,
a little girl who saves her friend Kai from
the Snow Queen. Disney’s Frozen is (very
loosely) based on this fairy tale.
• The Emperor’s New Clothes tells of
how an emperor is duped into believing
that he is wearing a wonderful suit of
clothes, when in fact he is completely
naked. Everyone goes along with the
belief in order to please the emperor
apart from one person. The phrase has
•
10
now entered the English language as
a way of describing a situation where
someone dares to speak the truth
about something when everyone else is
pretending it’s different.
The Princess and the Pea, which tells
of a princess who is so sensitive that
she can feel a pea through a huge pile
of mattresses, is sometimes confused
with The Princess and the Frog (from
the German fairy tales of the Brothers
Grimm), though the stories are different.
Pre-teach any tricky words and phrases
such as ridiculous and more or less. Play and
pause the recording as needed. Students
answer the questions and compare answers
with a partner.
1.12
Answers
1 The first woman used to enjoy The Ugly
Duckling. She didn’t like The Emperor’s
New Clothes, and she didn’t use to like
The Little Mermaid, although she does
now.
The second woman enjoyed The Ugly
Duckling, The Little Mermaid and The
Princess and the Frog.
2 The Snow Queen
Transcript
woman 1 Did you use to read Andersen’s fairy
tales when you were a child?
woman 2 Some of them. I used to love The
Ugly Duckling.
woman 1 Yes, I often used to read that one,
too. But I hated The Emperor’s New
Clothes.
woman 2 Why?
woman 1 Because it was such a ridiculous
story! And he was such a stupid
emperor! He really believed he was
wearing invisible clothes? Come off
it!
woman 2 Well, they are fairy tales, so they
aren’t supposed to be true to life –
that’s the whole point!
woman 1 Hmm. I suppose so. It’s funny how
you can change your mind about
things, though. The Little Mermaid
certainly isn’t true to life, and I didn’t
use to like it at all when I was a child.
Unit 2
51
woman 2
woman 1
woman 2
But my four-year-old daughter loves
it, and so now I enjoy reading it with
her.
Oh, I used to love The Little Mermaid.
I used to watch the Disney version a
lot, too. I liked The Princess and the
Frog, too.
Don’t you mean The Princess and the
Pea? Andersen wrote The Princess
and the Pea. The Princess and the
Frog was a Grimm’s fairy tale.
Oh, was it? Well, they’re all more or
less the same story, aren’t they? The
princess meets the prince and they
fall in love!
GRAMMAR used to
11 Elicit the examples of used to and write them
on the board. Read them aloud and point out
that used to and use to are pronounced the
same way (/ˈjuːstə/).
Answers
His father used to read ...
His mother didn’t use to read ...
12 Students complete the sentences in the table
in pairs; elicit the rules for affirmative, negative
and question forms (‘Used to’ is used in
the affirmative, ‘use to’ in the negative and
questions).
Concept-check and ask whether used to
describes the past or the present (the past) and
whether the action described still happens or
not (it doesn’t).
Answers
1 use to 2 used to
3 didn’t use to
Tip: Students sometimes use the past tense
instead of the base form of the verb after
used to, and use used in the negative
and question forms instead of use, so
watch out for mistakes and correct as
needed.
52
Unit 2
Extra ideas: Draw a time line (see below)
and repeat the sentence quickly so that
students notice the weak form in the
pronunciation of to: /juːs tuː/ – /juːs tə/.
I used to read when I was young.
past
xxxxxx
future
_________________________
now
Draw attention to the Grammar spot and
ask which sentence refers to the present
(I usually go riding on Sundays) and which
to the past (I used to go riding on Sundays).
Elicit that both phrases refer to habits, not
one-off actions.
Speaking and writing
13 EVERYBODY UP! Students walk around
the room and ask each other the questions.
Monitor and note down any mistakes.
Highlight good English and correct mistakes in
feedback. Do a quick class summary to find the
most popular programmes then and now.
Tip: It’s often nice to play some music in the
background (preferably without lyrics,
as they can be distracting). This creates
a relaxed atmosphere and encourages
students to speak more loudly and
clearly. In addition, it also helps you bring
activities to a close. When you stop the
music, students realise the activity is
finishing.
Extra idea: Ask students if they recognise
either of the programmes in the photos
(top right: Sesame Street; bottom: Teenage
Mutant Ninja Turtles). Both of these
programmes have been running for many
years. Ask students if any of their favourite
programmes have been on TV for a long
time. Do they watch any of the same
programmes as their parents watched
when they were young?
14 Write a short example on the board to model
the activity or ask students to look again at the
Nordic noir text on page 16 of the Student’s
Book. Give them time to think of ideas and
write bullet-point notes before writing their
paragraph. Walk around and offer gentle
correction and language as needed. Students
work in pairs to read each other’s descriptions
afterwards.
Extra idea: Students write their
descriptions without mentioning the title of
the TV series. When they read each other’s
descriptions, they have to guess which
series is being described.
15 VIDEO OPTION Students record their vlogs
on their smartphones. They can upload them
onto YouTube if they want, but don’t make it
compulsory, as some students may not want to
do this.
Extra idea: To review and practise used
to in a personalised way, ask students to
write down three true or false statements
about their childhood (eg I used to eat
dog biscuits when I was a little girl!). Ask
them to walk around the room and share
their sentences with each other. They
have to guess whether the other students’
sentences are true or false. Get feedback
on some of the funniest and craziest
sentences.
Take a break
You could play some relaxing instrumental music
while students do this. Encourage one or two
students to share their recollections with the class.
Lesson 2 The world of
telenovelas pp18–19
Aims
The focus of this lesson is the huge popularity of
Brazilian ‘telenovelas’ like Avenida Brasil and Salve
Jorge. The Grammar section looks at the present
perfect continuous, and students also learn and
guess the meaning of new vocabulary in context,
watch online video clips and practise listening to
and acting out a soap-opera scene in pairs.
You first!
To introduce the topic, students look at the photo
and guess what kind of programme it is (a soap
opera). If students are familiar with Avenida
Brasil, ask extra questions (eg What kind of things
happen? What kind of characters are there?).
Reading
1
GUESS Elicit or explain what a blackout is
(= a power cut). Students then discuss the
question together in pairs. Check their ideas in
class feedback.
Answer
The final episode of Avenida Brasil was due
to air on that date and almost 100,000,000
people were expected to watch. A blackout
would have stopped them watching and
finding out who killed Max.
2 Students read the article quickly for gist, then
check their ideas. Set a short time limit so
they don’t worry too much about unknown
vocabulary (this is covered in the following
activity).
3 Students guess the meaning of the words and
phrases in context. They then compare with a
partner.
MA Allow weaker students to use a dictionary.
Answers
air: to be broadcast on TV
rally: a public meeting of a large group of
people (often about politics)
turn up: to come or arrive, usually
unplanned
left out: excluded, not invited
posh: relating to people from a high social
class
emerging: starting to exist
proud: feeling pleasure or satisfaction
because of something you have done
origins: where someone or something
comes from
reflect: to show a sign of something
get hold of: to get or obtain something
4 Students read the article again and decide
if the sentences are true, false or the article
doesn’t say. Encourage students to correct the
false statements.
Unit 2
53
Answers
1 Don’t know (It’s unlikely, but the article
doesn’t say.)
2 False (The rally was cancelled.)
3 True (Students will need to work this
one out: 150 divided by 6 (Mon–Sat) is
25 weeks, so about six months.)
4 True
5 True
6 False (They spend a lot of money doing
research, and sometimes change the
plot to match what audiences want.)
Extra idea: Ask students to read the article
and find out what these numbers refer to:
2012 100,000,000 150 740
Answers
2012
Year in which the final
episode of Avenida Brasil
was broadcast
100,000,000 The approximate number of
viewers that were expected
to watch it
150
The number of episodes in a
series
740
The percentage increase in
the number of Brazilians
who travelled to Turkey
5
6
Speaking
7 Students discuss two of the questions in pairs.
They’ll have to read and understand all of them
in order to make their choice of which two to
discuss. Feed back as a class.
MA Encourage the stronger students to talk
about three or four questions.
video link
Students look for Avenida Brasil clips (or clips of
another soap opera) online and discuss it. Did they
like it? Why? / Why not?
Extra idea: Find a clip online of a soap in
a language other than English and show it
to students. If there are English subtitles,
cover them so students can’t see them.
Ask students to write their own subtitles in
English for the scene based on the context
they see. Check their ideas in feedback.
Play the clip again and show the subtitles
so they can compare their ideas.
GRAMMAR Present perfect continuous
Close books. Students try to remember
how people are influenced by telenovelas, then
read the article again and check their answers.
Ask students to look at the grammar box or review
it on the board with a time line and conceptchecking questions.
Answers
People want to wear the same clothes,
shoes and make-up.
They want to have the same objects and
furniture in their houses.
People want to go on holiday to the
locations featured in the telenovelas.
Telenovelas have been changing.
THINK Students write extra ideas and check
answers in feedback.
Extra ideas: Students find out why soap
operas are called ‘soaps’. They could
research this online or look at the Reading
text on page 13 of the Workbook.
You could also discuss product placement.
Ask students if they can remember good
54
examples of this kind of promotion (James
Bond films often do product placement
of watches, cars and clothes. Soap operas
sometimes advertise breakfast cereals,
drinks, computers, etc).
Unit 2
past
•
•
•
•
•
x
future
_________________________
now
When did telenovelas start? (in the past)
Are they still on TV now? (yes)
Are they the same as before? (No, they’ve
changed.)
When did they change? (They started changing
in the past and they’re still changing now.)
Will they continue to change in the future?
(Maybe, it’s possible.)
Repeat sentences in the present perfect continuous
and point out the weak form of the auxiliary verbs:
/hæv biːn/ – /həv bɪn/.
8 Look at the example together, then students
write the sentences in pairs. Do some
repetition drilling with the answers to help
pronunciation.
Point out that although all of the sentences
have time expressions, we don’t always have to
use them with the present perfect continuous.
Answers
1 It’s been raining all day.
2 Prices have been rising all year.
3 I’ve been trying to ring you all weekend.
4 You’ve been wearing that shirt all
week!
9 Students complete the information and
compare with a partner. Get feedback and
elicit reasons for their choices. You may want
to point out that be is not used in the present
perfect continuous:
I have been being a teacher for three years.
I have been a teacher for three years.
Answers
1 has been running 2 have been watching
3 have been 4 have been going
5 have been listening
Extra idea: Students find examples of the
present perfect continuous with for and
since in the text in 9, as described in the
Grammar spot.
Extra idea: To review the present perfect
continuous, show students the movie
trailer of Cast Away with Tom Hanks on
YouTube (https://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=2TWYDogv4WQ).
Tell students they’ve just arrived on a rescue
ship and found the castaway on the desert
island. Elicit some of the conversation
(eg ‘How long have you been living here?’
‘About two years.’ ‘What have you been
eating?’ ‘I’ve been eating coconuts ...’). Then
ask students to act out the conversation in
pairs.
Lesson 3 Influential people
pp20–21
Aims
The focus of this lesson is a text about two TV
presenters. Students give short talks about famous
presenters in their own countries and review
grammar from the first two lessons. The lesson
also introduces the suffix -ish to describe things in
an imprecise and vague way.
Warm-up
Do an image search and find 12 photos of famous
people. Put students into two teams and show
six photos to each team. Teams get a point for
identifying the person correctly and another point
if they can say why that person is famous or
influential.
Speaking and writing
Reading
10 Students ask and answer questions in pairs to
complete their tables. When they’ve finished,
they compare tables to check their answers.
You could discuss the questions in the third
part of the exercise as a whole class.
1 Find out how many students recognise David
Attenborough. If quite a few of them do, ask
them to discuss the questions in pairs (ensuring
that each pair has at least one student who
knows who he is). If students don’t recognise
him, run through the questions quickly as a
class. It’s possible they might remember some
of his wildlife programmes.
11 Give students time to think about the
questions and plan what the scene is about
and what they’d like to say. They then act out
the scene in pairs.
MA Adjust the size of the groups to suit the
ability of students: stronger students can work
in pairs or groups of three; weaker students
may need the support of a larger group.
2 Set a short time limit so that students read for
gist. Elicit similarities and differences.
Unit 2
55
Answers
A 1 are 2 have you been 3 Do 4 did
5 do; want
B 1 do 2 have you been 3 Do 4 did
5 Will
Answers
Similarities: Both presenters and writers
who have worked around the world.
Differences: Man / woman, worked on
different types of programme, different
lengths of time working in TV.
3
Close books. Read out the questions and
see if students can remember the answers.
Make a note of their answers on the board.
They then look back at the information to
check.
MA Allow weaker students to look back at the
information to help them.
Answers
1 David (He has been working in
television for over 60 years; Claudia has
worked in television since 1991.)
2 She has been involved in news
programmes, game shows, children’s
shows, film programmes, comedy
quizzes, travel shows, a sewing series,
a dancing show (Strictly Come Dancing)
and the Eurovision Song Contest.
3 David (probably because of the length
of time he has been presenting natural
history and wildlife programmes, and
because of his work with environmental
projects)
4 Both of them have worked as writers
and presenters.
5 Claudia
Speaking
4
MINI-TALK Students can use their
smartphones and tablets to find out
information. Remind them to use the
paragraphs about David and Claudia as
models. If students are shy about presenting
in front of the class, let them do presentations
in pairs or small groups to alleviate any
nervousness.
5 Students complete the questions with the
correct verb tense. Check the questions, then
tell students to ask and answer them with
a partner. They should make a note of the
answers they’re given.
56
Unit 2
6 Ask several pairs to report the answers that
they were given in 5. Note them on the
board, then ask the class questions to form
a picture of the survey results (eg Carla has
been studying for longer than Raúl. She’s
been studying for five years. Has anyone been
studying for longer than that?). Build up a class
profile for the first three questions based on
students’ responses, then discuss question 4 as
a whole class.
Listening 1
7
GUESS Give students a minute to read the
short text, then encourage them to make
predictions about what Karl noticed and share
their ideas.
8
1.13 Play and pause the recording as
necessary so students can check if their
predictions in 7 were correct.
Also point out phrases like Sorry? (to check
and get people to say something again), but
here’s the (really strange) thing (to prepare
someone to listen to something important),
Exactly! (to show agreement), and No! and
Really? (to show interest).
Answer
He noticed that his female co-presenters
received a lot of negative feedback about
their appearance, but he didn’t receive any.
Transcript
woman Did you read this article about that
Australian news presenter, Karl
Stevanovic?
man
Sorry? What Australian news
presenter?
woman Karl Stevanovic – he’s quite well
known.
man
No, I’ve never heard of him. Why?
What’s he done?
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
Well, he’s been a news presenter
on Australian TV for over 20 years
apparently, and for years he’s noticed
that women news presenters get lots
of negative criticism from viewers.
Do they? Why?
Well, that’s what’s interesting. It’s not
professional criticism. It’s always about
their hair and their clothes and their
make-up – things like that.
No!
Yeah. But – and now here’s the
really strange thing – no one’s ever
commented on his appearance!
Why not? Oh, because he’s a man,
you mean!
Exactly!
Well, that seems very unfair, doesn’t
it? It doesn’t seem right at all.
No, but here’s the thing – he decided
to do something about it.
Really? What did he do?
He wore the same blue suit on-screen
every day for a whole year.
The same suit every day for a year?
Wow. So what happened?
Absolutely nothing. Nobody noticed.
Nobody noticed? So he made his
point!
Yes, he did. He said it was very clear
that viewers judged him on how well
he did his job: his interviews, his sense
of humour and so on.
But viewers don’t seem to judge
women on those kinds of professional
things at all, do they? Just on their
appearance.
Exactly!
9 Students listen again and answer the
questions.
Answers
1 He wore the same blue suit on-screen
every day for a whole year.
2 He proved that viewers don’t notice
what male presenters wear in the same
way that they do for female presenters.
3 Nobody noticed.
10 Students discuss the questions and give their
personal reactions to the story.
Listening 2
11 PREDICT Students read the introduction
and write their predictions down. Get quick
feedback and note their ideas, but don’t
confirm anything at this stage.
12
Play the recording and check if
students’ predictions were correct. Point out
that Vera says they got used to the treatment
they received from men. Elicit and check the
difference between used to and get used to.
Which one describes a past habit (used to) and
which one describes something we become
accustomed to (get used to)?
1.14
Answers
She says that when she worked in TV,
female presenters were criticised for what
they wore and how they looked, whereas
male presenters weren’t. Female presenters
were also discriminated against because of
their weight and age.
Transcript
presenter Did you hear that story about that
man in Australia, Vera? The TV
news presenter who wore the same
suit every day for 365 days and
no one noticed? He said he did it
in solidarity with women, as they
always get criticised for what they
wear.
vera
Yes, I did read that story, and I’m
shocked that it’s still true nowadays.
When I was working on TV – for
about 20 years – we always had to
look smart every time we appeared.
Directors wouldn’t hesitate to tell us
if they didn’t like the colour or style
of our clothes, or the pattern, or our
scarves or jewellery, or anything!
presenter Really?
vera
Yes, and our hair too! And shoes
were another thing. We always had
to wear heels in the studio, and
preferably shortish skirts. It sounds
absurd, when viewers couldn’t even
see our feet and legs. But we just
got used to it all.
presenter But male colleagues didn’t have
similar rules?
Unit 2
57
vera
presenter
vera
presenter
vera
presenter
vera
13
No. The men could look really awful
– and they often did – and it didn’t
seem to matter one bit! They had
spots, grey hair, thick glasses …
And I think you said weight was an
issue, too?
Yes, I used to get a lot of criticism
about my weight. Because, guess
what, I’m not super thin like a
stick insect! But a lot of my male
colleagues were actually quite fat
and it didn’t seem to be a problem.
They never received negative
comments about it.
And wasn’t there an issue with age,
too?
Yes, there was. And there still is,
in fact. TV executives definitely
prefer younger women, regardless
of their talent on air. Certainly I
noticed that once women got over
40, and certainly by 50, they were
slowly being pushed off the screen
into more invisible roles: producing,
researching, voicing, etc.
But age isn’t an issue for men?
No, absolutely not. Older men are
supposed to look serious and inspire
confidence. But older women?
They’re past their best! I know from
my female colleagues still working in
TV that there is still prejudice. It’s just
that it is better hidden than it used
to be.
Students try to remember what Vera said
about each thing, then compare their ideas
with a partner.
Answers
the colour / style / pattern of her clothes:
Directors would say if they didn’t like them.
shoes: Female presenters had to wear heels
in the studio, even though viewers couldn’t
see their legs or feet.
skirts: They had to wear shortish skirts.
weight: Vera got a lot of criticism because
she wasn’t super-thin like a stick insect, but
some of her male colleagues were quite fat
and no one said anything.
age: TV executives prefer younger women,
and once women are over 40 or 50, they are
moved to off-screen roles.
58
Unit 2
older women: Are considered to be past
their best.
older men: Look serious and inspire
confidence.
14 Students listen again and check, and also add
anything they missed. You could ask extra
questions to check their understanding:
•
•
•
How long did Vera work in TV? (about 20
years)
How did she feel about the story about
Karl? (She was shocked.)
Why was she criticised? (for her appearance
and weight)
Extra idea: Students read the transcript
at the back of the Student’s Book and find
words or phrases that mean the following:
agreement and support for people (solidarity)
pause or stop for a moment (hesitate)
if possible (preferably)
stupid or unreasonable (absurd)
problem (issue)
unfair opinion against a group of people
(prejudice)
15 TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE Write the phrase
and preferably shortish skirts on the board and
ask students what they think the suffix -ish
means (It’s a suffix added to adjectives used to
describe a vague degree of something). Explain
that it’s often used with colours (greenish) and
to talk about time (I’ll meet you at eightish).
Students look at the items in the box and
describe the difference between them. Discuss
with the whole class whether students have
ever worn these things. Ask why / why not.
MA Help weaker students by asking questions
like Which is shorter, a short skirt or a shortish
skirt? (a short skirt).
Extra idea: If you have a mixture of male
and female students, have a discussion
about the different treatment of male
and female TV presenters. Have the male
students ever made critical comments
about female TV presenters because of
their appearance? Have female students
ever noticed what male TV presenters are
wearing?
Speaking
16 Students discuss their opinions and the things
that surprised or shocked them. Get feedback
and encourage further discussion about
prejudice against women. Are women treated
fairly now, or is the prejudice just better hidden
than it used to be?
17 YOUR STORY Students try to remember a
time when they’ve been treated unfairly. Give
them time to think about the questions and
then share their stories in small groups.
Tell them to look at the cartoon and ask
a pair of confident students to act it out,
exaggerating the emotions. Ask another pair of
students to act it out again, but changing the
detail that’s noticed (eg Yes, awful. What an
ugly pair of earrings!).
Everyday English p22
TV talk
1 Students look at the photo and say what the
people are doing (watching TV together). They
then match the questions and answers in pairs.
Check answers by asking various pairs to read
out the mini-dialogues.
Answers
1f 2e 3d
4b
5a
6c
Background note
BBC 1 is one of the TV channels in the UK
broadcast by the BBC, which is funded by
a television licence instead of advertising
revenue. Every house with a TV in the UK
has to buy a annual licence, which currently
costs about £150. Because of this, none of
the BBC channels has any commercials.
BBC 1 broadcasts mainstream programmes,
including popular soaps and series. Other
BBC channels are BBC 2, BBC 3, BBC 4,
BBC News, CBBC and CBeebies.
2
1.15 Play and pause the recording so
students can tick the exchanges they hear.
Answer
They hear all the exchanges apart from
5a and 6c.
Transcript
man
What’s on?
woman 1 Nothing much. Just my quiz show.
man
Where’s the remote?
woman 1 You’re sitting on it!
man
Oh, so I am. What time does your
show start?
woman 1 About now, I think.
man
What channel is it on?
woman 1 I think it’s on BBC1.
man
Thing is, there’s a match on.
woman 1 Oh.
man
Mind if we change channels?
woman 1 No, go ahead. We can watch this
later on catch-up. Sue and I have got
things to talk about, anyway.
woman 2 Yes, shall we go and sit over there in
the kitchen and …
man
Would you mind not standing in
front of the telly?
woman 1 So sorry.
***
man
Do you think you could keep
the noise down? I can’t hear the
commentary.
woman 2 Oh, sorry.
man
And can you make me a cup of tea
while you’re there?
woman 1 Actually, no, Ted. Make it yourself!
We’ve decided to go out!
Extra idea: Highlight examples of natural
features of English in the recording, such
as ellipsis and vague language. Write
these extracts on the board and explain
how words are often left out to avoid
redundancy.
What’s on TV? (ellipsis)
There’s nothing much on TV. (ellipsis)
Where’s the remote control? (ellipsis)
It starts about now, I think. (vague
language)
You could also point out that telly is
colloquial language for TV and that watch
something on catch-up means to watch a
programme by accessing it via a computer
or digital TV box.
3 Students discuss in groups what they think of
Ted. Elicit their ideas in feedback.
Unit 2
59
Requests and responses
4 Students complete the requests and compare
their ideas with a partner. Play the recording
again for them to check their answers. Draw
their attention to the Grammar spot and
explain that we often shorten questions in
informal speech: Mind if ...? is short for
Would / Do you mind if ...?
Answers
1 Mind if we change channels?
2 Can you make me a cup of tea while
you’re there?
3 Do you think you could keep the noise
down?
4 Would you mind not standing in front
of the telly?
5 Students quickly discuss the questions in pairs.
Do a class check to ensure they understand the
form and levels of politeness.
Answers
1 Mind if we change channels? and Can
you make me a cup of tea while you’re
there? are more polite.
2 Would you mind not ... is followed by
the -ing form.
Extra idea: Ask students if they think the
woman is being sincere when she replies
So sorry in response to the request not to
stand in front of the TV (no). Elicit that she
does this using a sarcastic tone of voice.
Ask pairs of students to read the request
and response, varying the tone of the reply
and ask the rest of the class if they think
the reply sounds sincere or not.
6 Students match the responses with the
requests in 4 and then repeat the requests and
responses in pairs.
Answers
1c 2b 3d
60
Unit 2
4a
Extra idea: Practise pronunciation. Elicit
where the stress is in each sentence. Play
the recording again and ask students to
say the requests and responses at the same
time, mimicking the stress and intonation
patterns used.
‘Mind if we change channels?’ ‘No, go
ahead.’
‘Would you mind not standing in front of
the telly?’ ‘So sorry.’
‘Do you think you could keep the noise
down?’ ‘Oh, sorry.’
‘Can you make me a cup of tea while
you’re there?’ ‘Actually, no.’
1.16 Model the vowel sound and ask
7 P
students to repeat it. They then say each
word aloud and find the odd one out, before
comparing with a partner to see if they agree.
Play the recording for them to check their
answers.
Answer
Food /fuːd/ is the odd one out. It has a
longer /uː/ vowel sound.
1.17 Students work in pairs and read
8 P
the three sentences aloud. They should
identify the connected speech by drawing a
line underneath sounds that change or link.
Write the three sentences on the board and
ask students to come and highlight the links
(examples of assimilation, vowel reduction and
vowel-to-vowel linking). Play the recording for
them to check, then do some repetition drilling
to help them say the sentences more quickly
and naturally.
Answers
1 Could you have a look at this?
/kʊd juː hæv ə lʊk æt ðɪs/
/ˈkʊʤəhævəˈlʊkətðɪs/
2 Mind if I open a window?
/maɪnd ɪf aɪ ˈəʊpən ə ˈwɪndəʊ/
/ˈmaɪndɪfaɪˈjəʊpənəˈwɪndəʊ/
3 Would you mind not pushing?
/wʊd juː maɪnd nɒt ˈpʊʃɪŋ/
/ˈwʊʤəˈmaɪndnɒtˈpʊʃɪn/
You stood on my foot!
/juː stʊd ɒn maɪ fʊt/ /jəˈstʊdɒnməˈfʊt/
9
ROLE-PLAY Play recording 1.15 again for
students to act out the conversation in groups
of three. Encourage them to speak naturally
and use the features of connected speech,
changing any details they want to.
MA Weaker students can take the part of
Woman 2, who has fewer lines.
Asking / telling people not to do things
10 Students complete the sentences with the
correct verb form, then compare their answers
with a partner. Elicit that the -ing form is used
after stop.
Answers
1 Please don’t do that.
2 Can / Could you not do that please?
3 Please stop doing that.
4 Can / Could / Would you stop doing
that, please?
11 Students discuss the sentences and meanings
in pairs and explain their ideas.
Answers
1 Request 4 (Would you mind not ...?)
asks people not to do things.
2 Possible responses: Oh, I’m sorry,
So sorry, I’m really sorry.
12 Students ask their partners to stop doing
annoying things. Remind them that it’s best to
sound polite when they say it, though! Give an
example and encourage them to have fun with
the activity (eg ‘Could you not do that, please?’
‘What?’ ‘Answering all the teacher’s questions
correctly. You make everyone else look bad!’).
Get feedback and find out the funniest
requests and most annoying habits!
Vocabulary plus p63
Wordbuilder un- and im1
Remind students of the adjectives they
circled when working on Lesson 1 Vocabulary.
They then work in pairs to answer the
questions. Question 3 is intended to be a fairly
open question to encourage discussion, so it
may be better as a whole-class activity. Ask
students which words are very similar in their
own language and which are very different.
Answers
1 unpopular, unpleasant, unglamorous,
uninteresting
2 imperfect, impersonal*
3 Suggested answers: open – closed;
terrible – great; shocking – expected;
strong – weak; leading – minor;
ordinary – extraordinary; hard – soft /
easy; good – bad; cold – warm; dark –
light / bright; lonely – crowded; foggy
– sunny / clear; grey – colourful; empty
– full; abandoned – lived-in
* The article on page 16 uses personal in the
collocation personal problems, so impersonal
isn’t really the opposite of this context. You
could elicit the meaning of impersonal from
students (= without human warmth; not
referring to people by name).
Extra idea: You could do this as a ‘tennis’
game: divide the class into two teams,
asking each team alternately for the
opposite of an adjective. If they get it
correct, they get a point and ‘play’ bounces
to the other team; if they get it wrong,
the other team gets a chance to ‘steal’ the
point.
2 Give students a few minutes to do the
matching exercise, then compare with a
partner.
Answers
1f 2c 3h
4b
5e
6g
7d
8a
2.22 Students work in pairs to say the
3 P
un- adjectives and decide which syllable is
stressed. Remind them that they all follow
the same pattern apart from one. Then play
the recording for them to check and repeat
together.
Answer
a) unusual
e) unlucky
b) unkind
f) unhappy
c) unnecessary
g) unfair
d) unexpected
h) untidy
They all have the stress on the syllable
that follows the prefix un- apart from
unexpected.
Unit 2
61
4 Students work in pairs to rewrite the
sentences. Then put pairs together to form
groups of four to discuss whether they agree
or disagree with the statements.
MA With a weaker class, go through the
sentences together first to identify which unadjective they need to use.
Suggested answers
1 Traffic laws are unnecessary.
2 Untidy hair means an untidy mind
3 It’s awful when you get unexpected
guests.
4 It’s unfair that some people have
everything and others nothing.
5 It’s unlucky when a black cat walks
across your path.
Extra idea: Ask students to write two
more sentences using the other adjectives
from 2 (unusual, unkind, unhappy). They
could do this in pairs, with student A
writing a sentence using word / phrase 1,
4 or 8, and student B rewriting it with the
appropriate adjective.
Used to v get used to
5 Tell students to read the four sentences, then
elicit the answers from the class.
Answers
a) 1, 3 b) 2, 4
6
FINISH IT Students complete the sentences
individually, then walk around the class
comparing their ideas.
Focus on: Verbs of the senses
a Students work in pairs to think of things that
the sentences could describe. There are lots of
potential answers here, so encourage them to
use their imaginations!
Suggested answers
1 cat, dog, bull, horse …
2 shoes, boots, jeans …
3 meal, ticket, dress …
4 flowers, roses, biscuits …
5 film, lecture, book …
6 soup, food, drink …
62
Unit 2
b Give students five minutes to write six similar
sentences using verbs of the senses (look, feel,
seem, smell, sound, taste). They then work
in pairs to think of answers to their partner’s
clues.
Phrasal verbs turn
7
Go through the box to make sure that
everyone understands the vocabulary.
Encourage students to look up any words they
don’t know in their dictionaries or on their
smartphones. They then answer the questions
in pairs. Ask students which words are very
similar in their own language and which are
very different.
Answers
1 air-conditioning, computer, engine,
heating, laptop, light, music, oven,
phone, sound, television
2 air-conditioning, heating, light, music,
oven, sound, television, volume
3 air-conditioning, heating, light, music,
oven, sound, television
Extra idea: Write these expressions and
meanings on the board and tell students to
match them:
1 fly on the wall (page 15)
2 Once upon a time … (page 17*)
3 Come off it! (page 17*)
4 You’d better sit down. (page 19)
5 Here’s the thing. (page 21*)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
I’m just about to explain it to you.
I don’t believe it. Don’t tell me lies.
outside, neutral observer
I’m about to tell you a fairy story.
I’m about to tell you something serious.
The expressions all occur in the unit; those
marked * are in the recordings.
Answers
1c 2d 3b
4e
5a
Units 1&2 Review
Aims
To review the vocabulary and grammar covered
in Units 1 and 2. Students also look at the first
Preposition park feature and read about water
festivals in Aspects of culture.
You first!
Ask students if they know the expression be
someone’s cup of tea (= be something that
someone likes). Tell them to look quickly at the
photos, which both come from TV series. Ask
them to identify the genre of each programme and
have a quick show of hands to find out how many
students would prefer to watch each programme.
Answer
The photos show a Nordic noir drama (on
the left) and a period drama (on the right).
Tip: Try to teach useful reading strategies.
Encourage students to guess meaning
from context rather than just looking
words up straight away in their
dictionaries or on their smartphones.
Words often have more than one
meaning, and this can lead to mistakes.
It’s important for students to read around
unknown words for contextual clues.
Model and practise the strategy in class
and encourage students with questions
(eg What do you think it means? How
do you know?).
3 Students work with a partner to complete the
text using the correct verb tenses.
Answers
1 appeared 2 has become 3 have seen
4 has been 5 follows 6 were 7 sank
8 was 9 had 10 were 11 finished
12 hoped 13 (has) won 14 was
15 say 16 think 17 love 18 are
Reading and grammar
1 Students look at the photos and write down
words they associate with the programmes
depicted. They then compare with a partner.
Did they have the same ideas, or were they
completely different? Ask them to give reasons
for their associations.
2 Pre-teach vocabulary like hit (= success), have
an impact on (= have a powerful effect on
someone or something), superb (= excellent
quality) and timeless (= something that has
a value that lasts forever). Students read the
description and work out which photo it goes
with. Have a quick feedback session with the
class to ask which words they used to help
them guess.
MA Encourage more able students to use
expressions of comparison, eg whereas, on the
other hand, but, to explain why the description
refers to one photo and not the other.
Answer
The description refers to Downton Abbey,
featured in the right-hand photo.
pp24–25
4 Students work in pairs and give reasons for
their choice of verb tenses. Check together in
feedback.
5
You could do this activity as a class quiz.
Put students in teams and ask them the
questions about the text. The first team to give
the correct answer wins a point. The team with
the most points at the end wins the game.
Answers
1 Its themes are universal and timeless.
2 It’s set in a magnificent country house
in the north of England during the first
part of the 20th century.
3 It’s about the lives of the wealthy
Crawley family and their servants.
4 Brazil, China, the Middle East, Russia,
Singapore, South Korea, the USA,
England (Europe is also mentioned, but
it’s a continent, not a country.)
Units 1&2 Review
63
also pick out useful words and phrases, eg in
my opinion, goodies and baddies, room for
doubt, stuff, believe it or not.
Extra idea: If Downton Abbey has been
on TV in students’ countries, ask them if
they’ve ever watched it, and if so, what
they thought of it.
6
THINK Students brainstorm ideas in pairs to
make two lists. They then work in new pairs to
compare their lists to see how similar / different
they are.
Listening
7
1.18 Play the first opinion and do the first
one with students. Then play the rest of the
recording for students to listen then compare
their answers.
Answers
17 23 3?
43
57
63
73
8?
Transcript
1 Downton? I can’t stand it. I think it’s
unrealistic and sentimental!
2 How can you say that? I’ve been watching
it since the beginning. It’s the best thing on
telly.
3 In my opinion, it isn’t really drama and it
isn’t really history. It isn’t really anything.
4 I absolutely love the music. It’s very
emotional. As soon as you hear it, you just
have to sit down and watch.
5 It shouldn’t be so black and white. The
goodies are very good and the baddies
are very bad. Life isn’t like that. There’s no
room for doubt.
6 Exactly! It’s very clear. There’s no ambiguity.
You don’t have to think too much.
7 I agree. Things should be clear. A lot of
stuff these days is confusing and I can’t
understand it. I like being told what to
think for a change!
8 I’m sorry. I can’t comment. Believe it or not,
I’ve never actually seen it!
8
Students work in pairs to remember
what each person said using the prompts.
The person with the best memory wins. Play
the recording again for them to check their
answers.
MA You may need to play each opinion
separately for weaker students to reconstruct
the sentences. With a stronger class, you could
64
Units 1&2 Review
Answers
1 I can’t stand it. I think it’s unrealistic and
sentimental!
2 I’ve been watching it since the
beginning. It’s the best thing on telly.
3 It isn’t really drama and it isn’t really
history. (It isn’t really anything.)
4 I absolutely love the music. It’s very
emotional. As soon as you hear it, you
just have to sit down and watch.
5 It shouldn’t be so black and white. The
goodies are very good and the baddies
are very bad. Life isn’t like that. There’s
no room for doubt.
6 It’s very clear. There’s no ambiguity. You
don’t have to think too much.
7 Things should be clear. A lot of stuff
these days is confusing and I can’t
understand it. I like being told what to
think for a change!
8 I can’t comment. Believe it or not, I’ve
never actually seen it!
Tip: Be flexible when correcting students’
work. If they’ve written something
grammatically and semantically correct,
even if it doesn’t quite match the
original, give them credit for it.
Extra idea: The recording offers a nice
opportunity to review and practise reported
speech. Draw a line down the middle of
the board to make two columns: direct
speech and reported speech. As you do 8,
elicit what the people said exactly and write
it in the direct speech column. Students
then work with a partner and make
sentences in the reported speech column.
direct speech
reported speech
I can’t stand
it. I think it’s
unrealistic and
sentimental!
She said (that) she couldn’t
stand it. She said (that)
it was unrealistic and
sentimental.
I’ve been
watching it since
the beginning.
It’s the best thing
on telly.
He said (that) he’d been
watching it since the
beginning. He said (that) it
was the best thing on telly.
It isn’t really
drama and it isn’t
really history.
It isn’t really
anything.
She said (that) it wasn’t
really drama and it wasn’t
really history. It wasn’t
really anything.
I absolutely love
the music.
He said (that) he absolutely
loved the music.
Life isn’t like
that. There’s no
room for doubt.
She said (that) life wasn’t /
isn’t* like that and there
was no room for doubt.
It’s very clear.
There’s no
ambiguity. You
don’t have to
think too much.
He said (that) it was very
clear. He said (that) there
was no ambiguity. He said
(that) you didn’t have to
think too much.
I like being told
what to think for
a change!
She said (that) she liked
being told what to think for
a change!
I can’t comment.
I’ve never
actually seen it!
He said (that) he couldn’t
comment. He said (that)
he’d never actually seen it!
* Accept the present tense here, as it’s a general truth.
9 Students discuss the questions, first in pairs,
then in whole-class feedback. They should tell
the class what their partner said in order to
review reported speech. If none of the students
has ever seen Downton Abbey, ask them if
they can think of a series that they’re familiar
with that presents a similar, ‘simplified’ view of
life.
Preposition park
a This is the first Preposition park section; this
feature occurs in several of the Review units.
Explain that it is intended to focus on the use
of prepositions and their common collocations,
which is often a difficult area for students of
English. Pre-teach any tricky vocabulary, eg
depend on (= rely on, need something else
to happen first), shrink (= become smaller),
practical (= relating to real situations rather
than ideals). Do the first one with the class to
model the activity, before students complete
the text in pairs.
Answers
1 of 2 on 3 on 4 Without 5 in
6 in / of 7 by 8 in 9 about 10 of
11 at 12 from 13 on 14 for / at
15 of 16 on 17 about / of
18 around / in 19 to 20 to
Extra idea: Students create a special page
in their vocabulary notebooks for ‘verb +
preposition’ combinations and pick out all
the examples from the text: depend on,
look at, sell something on, focus on.
b Students discuss the questions in pairs first;
encourage more ideas and speaking in
feedback.
EXPLORE ONLINE
If you don’t have internet access in the classroom,
students can do this for homework, as they’ll need
the details for c.
c
MINI-TALK Give students time to read the
questions, think and write ideas and notes
before they do the speaking activity. Put
them in small groups and tell them to discuss
together.
MA Split the task and allocate different
aspects to different students (eg finding out
about Irena Salina, finding out more about
Flow, finding out facts about the worldwide
water supply). Students then compile their
information and collaborate in a class
presentation.
Aspects of culture
a Students read the information and choose their
favourite festival. Tell them to give reasons
why.
Extra idea: Split the class into two and
ask each half to read one of the texts. They
then present ‘their’ festival to the other half
of the class.
b Students read the information again and
answer questions about it. They could also
write three more questions about the texts and
test each other.
Answers
1 The festivals both involve water.
2 The celebrations are for different
reasons in different countries and
sometimes religions. They also involve
different names, traditions and ways of
celebrating.
Units 1&2 Review
65
3 The Water Festival celebrates the new
year.
The Bloco da Lama honours the
ancestors of indigenous Indians in
Brazil.
4 Traditionally, people poured water on
each other to show respect, to get rid
of bad spirits and to bring good luck.
The Bloco da Lama started when the
indigenous Indians covered themselves
in the black mud for the health
benefits.
c
Students look up information about a festival
in their country and share in small groups. Ask
one or two groups to present their festival to
the class.
MA Form groups that contain a mixture of
stronger and weaker students, but ensure the
stronger students don’t dominate by giving
each student ten counters. Each time they
contribute to the discussion, they ‘spend’ one
of their counters. Once they have spent them
all, they must keep quiet until everyone has
spent all their counters.
66
Units 1&2 Review
3
UNIT
FOCUS
What music does
GRAMMAR: could / was able to / managed to; past continuous; past perfect; past conclusions
VOCABULARY: musical instruments; body metaphors; where to put things; saying what you like
FUNCTION: complimenting someone’s performance
Introduction p25
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to introduce the topic of
music and the effect that it has on people’s lives.
Students learn the names of musical instruments
and are encouraged to think about a wide variety
of musical styles, not just mainstream types.
Tip: If students have difficulty guessing where
the stress is (they often do), tell them to
just hum the word instead. It takes the
emphasis off the word and focuses on
the sound and rhythm, making the stress
much easier to hear.
Extra idea: Find out if anyone plays any of
the instruments listed. Do any students play
instruments that are not listed (eg clarinet,
oboe, French horn)? Expand the lexical set
to ensure that students can describe their
own musical interests. Remind students
that the collocation is play an instrument –
no preposition is needed.
You first!
Students discuss in pairs how important music is
to them. Write extra questions on the board to
increase speaking and learner interaction (eg How
often do you listen to music? Where do you listen
to it? How do you listen to it? Do you use an mp3
player, CD player, laptop or listen to songs on your
smartphone or tablet? Do you like listening to
music on the radio? Do you ever go to concerts?
Do you prefer live music?).
3
1 Give students time to check they understand
all the words in the box. They then take turns
acting out the instruments for their partner
and guessing the instruments.
Answers
Yuja Wang: piano, China
Courtney Pine: saxophone, England
Hilary Hahn: violin, the USA
Anoushka Shankar: sitar, England
Rodrigo y Gabriela: guitar, Mexico
Toumani Diabaté: kora, Mali
Extra idea: If there are any instruments
in the list that students haven’t heard of,
encourage them to research them online.
2
1.19
Play the recording for students
to mark the word stress in each word. If
necessary, do the first one with them as an
example. Get feedback and do some repetition
drilling to practise pronunciation. Ask students
which words are very similar in their own
language and which are very different.
Answers
bagpipes, bass guitar, cello, double bass,
drums, flute, guitar, harp, keyboard,
kora, piano, saxophone, sitar, trombone,
trumpet, violin
GUESS Students work in pairs and guess the
answers to the questions. If possible, they can
check their answers quickly online using their
smartphones or tablets.
4
1.20 Students listen and check their
answers. You could also show them short clips
on YouTube of each musician.
Transcript
Yuja Wang plays the piano. She was born
in Beijing, China. She started playing the
piano when she was six. She’s a really
brilliant pianist – but she says she loves
fashion too!
Courtney Pine plays the saxophone – and
many other instruments. He was born in
London. His parents are from Jamaica.
Unit 3
67
Hilary Hahn is a violinist. She was born in
Virginia, USA. She started to play the violin
when she was four years old.
Rodrigo Sánchez and Gabriela Quintero
play guitars. They were both born in
Mexico City. They used to play in a rock
band, but now they play their own special
kind of music.
Anoushka Shankar plays the sitar. She is
the daughter of the great Indian sitar player
Ravi Shankar. He started to give her music
lessons when she was seven. She was born
in London, England, and lives in London
and New Delhi.
Toumani Diabaté plays the kora, a popular
West African instrument. He is a music
superstar from Mali. He plays his kora all
over the world.
5 Give students a few seconds to read the
questions so they know what to listen for. Play
and pause the recording as necessary. Remind
them that they don’t need to write every word
when they make notes.
Answers
1 Yuja Wang is from China.
Courtney Pine is from England.
Hilary Hahn is from the USA.
Rodrigo Sánchez and Gabriela Quintero
are from Mexico.
Anoushka Shankar is from England.
Toumani Diabaté is from Mali.
2 Yuja Wang was born in Beijing.
Courtney Pine was born in London.
Hilary Hahn was born in Virginia, USA.
Rodrigo Sánchez and Gabriela Quintero
were born in Mexico City.
Anoushka Shankar was born in London.
Toumani Diabaté was born in Mali.
3 Courtney Pine’s parents came from
Jamaica.
Anoushka Shankar is the daughter of the
great Indian sitar player Ravi Shankar.
4 Yuja started playing the piano when she
was six.
Hilary started playing when she was four
years old.
Rodrigo and Gabriela used to play in a
rock band.
Anoushka started playing when she was
seven years old.
Toumani plays his kora all over the world.
68
Unit 3
EXPLORE ONLINE
This activity can either be done in class or for
homework. Encourage students to look up the
musicians online using their smartphones or
tablets. Get feedback (eg Which musicians did you
like best? Why? What famous musicians are there
in your country?).
6
EVERYBODY UP! Students walk around the
room and find out more about each other’s
musical skills, then report back in feedback
This is also a nice opportunity to practise the
past simple and present perfect continuous,
which were featured in Unit 2 (eg When did
you start? How long have you been playing the
guitar? Have you been taking lessons?).
Lesson 1 Making music
differently pp26–27
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to practise could /
was able to / managed to to describe ability and
things we have succeeded in doing. Students also
read about two famous musicians, learn body
metaphors and share information about their own
personal achievements.
You first!
Students work in pairs or small groups to tell each
other about special abilities they have. They should
report back in feedback.
Background notes
• Evelyn Glennie was born on 19
July, 1965, and is a famous Scottish
percussionist. She grew up in
Aberdeenshire and studied at Ellon
Academy and the Royal Academy of
Music. Glennie has been deaf since the
age of 12. However, although her music
teacher believed she would never be
able to continue with her music career,
she went on to become a successful
international performer. She often plays
barefoot during her live performances
and studio recordings to feel the music
better. She has received many awards for
her music and work for charity and has
been nominated for the Polar Music Prize
of 2015.
• Jean ‘Django’ Reinhardt was born on
23 January, 1910, in Liberchies, Pont-à-
Celles, Belgium. Django (which means
‘I awake’ in Romani) was attracted to
music at an early age and quickly learnt
to play the violin, banjo and guitar.
But at the age of 18, in 1928, he was
injured in a fire and received first- and
second-degree burns over half his body;
two of the fingers of his left hand were
also badly burned. Doctors believed
that he would never play guitar again,
but with rehabilitation and practice, he
learnt to play in a completely new way.
He is regarded as one of the greatest
guitar players of all time and created an
entirely new style of jazz guitar technique
(sometimes called ‘hot’ jazz guitar).
Django died in Fontainebleau at the
age of 43. Since his death, many guitar
players and musicians (including Jeff Beck
and Paul McCartney) have expressed their
admiration for Django Reinhardt, or have
cited him as a major influence.
Reading
1 Students look at the photos and the title of the
article and write down five things they expect
to read about. They then read the article and
check to see if their predictions were right.
Students re-read the article and answer the
questions. Check answers in feedback.
Answers
1 Evelyn Glennie played clarinet, but now
she plays drums and percussion.
Django Reinhardt played the banjo, the
violin and the guitar.
2 They both overcame disabilities.
2 Put students in pairs for the jigsaw reading
activity, asking and answering each other’s
questions about the musicians.
Answers
EVELYN
1 She lost her hearing.
2 Her teacher thought it was impossible
for Evelyn to become a musician.
3 She realised that she could ‘hear’ music
with other parts of her body and went
on to get a place at the Royal College
of Music in London.
DJANGO
1 He was burned in a fire.
2 The doctors said he wouldn’t play music
again.
3 He learnt to play the guitar in a
different style using only his index and
middle fingers and played with jazz
violinist Stéphane Grappelli in the Hot
Club in Paris, France.
Tip: Ask students to read the instructions out
loud sometimes. This involves them more
in the lesson and keeps them on their
toes – they’ll be listening in case you ask
them! It also involves different learning
styles – some students will understand
more quickly this way than if they just
listen to you read the instruction.
3 Give students time to make questions about
the article. Walk around, help and correct as
needed. Then put them in pairs for them to ask
and answer each other’s questions.
MA Stronger students can be left to write
questions individually, whereas weaker
students will find it easier to do this in pairs. If
they do, ensure they do the second half of the
activity (answering the questions) with a new
partner.
Extra idea: Students find words or phrases
in the text that mean:
level of sound (pitch)
unable to hear (deaf)
succeed or do something difficult
(manage to)
a position (a place)
get enough money to pay bills and buy
food (earn a living)
think or have an opinion about someone
or something (consider)
EXPLORE ONLINE
This activity can either be done in class or for
homework. Encourage students to look up the
musicians online using their smartphones or
tablets and share their information.
Unit 3
69
Grammar could / was able to / managed to
4 Students match the sentences and meanings.
They can also look back at the article to help
them. Ask personalised questions and ask
students to think of something they could /
couldn’t do, managed to do / didn’t manage to
do, were able to do / weren’t able to do.
8 Elicit what a metaphor is; students then guess
and complete the sentences with the words
in the box in 7. Tell them that often there’s no
logical explanation for metaphors of this type;
they’re just phrases we say!
Answers
1 hand 2 leg 3 finger 4 face
5 fingers 6 shoulder 7 chin 8 arm; leg
Answers
1b 2c 3a
5 Students complete the sentence and compare
with a partner. After checking answers, elicit
why could is wrong (it requires a conditional
clause, eg He could finish his essay in time if he
didn’t have to go to football practice).
Answers
was able to, managed to
6 Look at the two examples as a class, then tell
students to write sentences about the pictures.
They then compare with a partner.
MA Stronger students could write two or three
sentences for each picture, or even build them
into a short story.
Extra idea: To practise the grammar in
a fun way, show a video clip of someone
trying to do something difficult (maybe
something like James Bond or Mr Bean in
Mr Bean’s Holiday). Students watch the clip
and write down as many sentences as they
can using could / couldn’t, managed to /
didn’t manage to, were able to / weren’t
able to.
Vocabulary Body metaphors (1)
7 Read out the body parts one at a time (or ask
students to read them out) and ask students to
point to the photo. You could also tell them to
point to the relevant parts of their own bodies.
Change the order and say them more quickly
to make it challenging and fun.
70
Unit 3
Extra idea: Students write the isolated
metaphors in their vocabulary notebooks,
eg to lend (someone) a hand, to pull
someone’s leg.
9
Ask students if they have similar phrases
in their language(s) or whether they are
completely different (eg in Germany, they don’t
keep their fingers crossed for luck, they press
their thumbs!).
10 Students could look up metaphors in
a dictionary or search online on their
smartphones. Get feedback and vote on the
most interesting, funny or strange metaphors.
Speaking and writing
11 YOUR STORY Ask students to think about
a personal achievement, something they
managed to do that they found difficult. Give
an example (eg running a marathon, learning
a language, etc) and tell them to write notes
about it. They then work their notes into a
story. Set a time limit and monitor, to offer help
and gentle correction.
12 Students work in pairs and tell each other
their stories from 11. They should take notes
and write a summary of their partner’s story.
Students then report back on their partner’s
story in class feedback.
Extra idea: Students tell each other
their stories, then ask their partner
comprehension questions about it (Where
was I when I did the bungee jump?, Who
was I with?, Where did I go afterwards?,
etc). Their partner has to listen, try to
remember the story and answer the
questions correctly.
Lesson 2 Music and rubbish
2
pp28–29
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to practise the past
continuous and the past perfect to describe
background actions and sequences of events.
Students also read about recycling and music,
learn about different containers and role-play an
interview about the article.
Warm-up
3 Set a short time limit for students to check
their predictions so they read quickly for gist
and don’t worry too much about unknown
vocabulary (they will focus on it in the next
activity). What things were interesting or
surprising about the story?
4
Write a long world on the board (eg unbelievable).
Students work in two teams to make as many
words as they can out of the letters. Give an
example, then set a short time limit (about two
minutes). The winner is the team with the most
words.
Background note
The Recycled Orchestra is a group of young
musicians from Cateura, Paraguay. The
orchestra is renowned for their instruments,
which are crafted from recycled materials
gathered from a landfill site that the
community is built upon and around.
Nicolás ‘Cola’ Gómez, a garbage picker,
collaborated with Favio Chávez, a musician
doing volunteer work, and together they
built instruments for over 100 different
students in 2006. Favio’s maxim is ‘Having
nothing is not an excuse for doing
nothing’. The orchestra has performed
concerts all over the world, and have
made a film entitled Landfill Harmonic.
With the money they have earned from
their concerts, the children of the Recycled
Orchestra have been able to buy a property
near Cateura, where a huge music school
and concert hall is being built. There will
also be free craft classes for all the residents
of Cateura.
Reading
1
Split the class into two or three teams and
tell students to write down as many musical
instruments as they can. Tell them it’s a race.
The first team to get 15 instruments wins the
game.
PREDICT Students look at the photos and
the title of the article and guess what the story
is about. Brainstorm as a class.
THINK Have a student read the question
aloud and check that everyone understands
what it refers to (Is it a good thing that the kids
of Cateura don’t have to play with rubbish any
more?). Students then discuss the question in
pairs and give their opinions in feedback.
Extra idea: Ask students if they know
how much instruments cost. What are
the cheapest instruments and the most
expensive? Students look at the Did you
know? spot. Do they think an instrument
can ever be worth so much money?
5 Students read the text again and find the
words that match the definitions. Check
together in feedback.
Answers
1 rubbish dump 2 garbage 3 recycle
4 measured 5 rewind 6 conductor
6 Students read all six questions, then choose
two to do a mini-presentation to the class
about. Encourage them to give as much
information as possible. If students feel
uncomfortable addressing the whole class,
allow them to work in groups and present to
their group instead.
MA Encourage stronger students to talk about
more questions.
7
TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE Explain that a
‘brainwave’ can also be a sudden, inspired idea
for solving a problem. Students discuss their
own ‘brainwaves’, then report back and vote
for the best stories.
MA Weaker students can have a quick look at
the list in 1 on page 25 before they start.
Unit 3
71
EXPLORE ONLINE
This can be done as homework or in class.
Students look up information online using their
smartphones and tablets. You could also direct
them to a website where they can see the movie
trailer: http://www.landfillharmonicmovie.com.
Ask for a few opinions.
Tip: Encourage students to notice the
grammar of sentences, especially
things like pronouns, conjunctions and
transition signals like contrast, result and
reason clauses. This helps them to see
sequences of events and tell their own
stories and anecdotes.
Grammar Past continuous; past perfect
8 Students complete the sentences in the table
and look back at the article if they need help.
They then answer the questions below the
table in pairs.
MA For weaker students, ask extra conceptchecking questions and draw timelines on the
board to check understanding.
Answers
1 was working
2 was carrying
3 had never seen 4 had made
a) had never seen, had made
b) was working, was carrying
9
Students work in pairs to put the
sentences in order, then listen to the recording
to check.
1.21
Extra idea: Write the sentences on slips of
paper to appeal to different learning styles
and introduce a kinaesthetic focus.
Answers and transcript
f) Ali was taking the rubbish out
k) when he suddenly remembered
something.
h) The day before he had taken his car to
the garage.
b) He had left it there,
a) and he had forgotten all about it.
g) He went back into his flat and put on
his coat.
e) He called a cab and went to the garage,
c) but he couldn’t see his car there.
j) The men at the garage were having
coffee.
d) He asked them about his car.
i) They had sent it to the recycling centre
because it was so old!
72
Unit 3
10
Students retell the story from 9 in pairs
from memory. Alternatively, you could tell
students the story but add in false information
and things that didn’t happen. Students have
to listen and correct you when they hear a
mistake.
Tip: When asking students to interrupt and
point out mistakes, encourage them to
do it politely, eg I’m sorry, but I think
that’s wrong.
Vocabulary Where to put things
11 Do the first one with the class as an example.
Students then match the words and containers.
Answers
garbage dump, landfill site, laundry basket,
recycling bin, rubbish dump, trash can,
waste paper bin
Extra idea: Some of these terms are more
common in American English. Students do
some research to find out which ones, and
what their British English equivalents are.
12 Write the names of the containers on the
board and produce a mind map with students’
ideas.
Speaking
13 ROLE-PLAY Students choose a role, then
read the article again and think of what they’d
like to say.
14 Students work in pairs to interview each other
in the role they chose in 13. Interviewers
should ask questions to cover the four bullet
points. Remind students to answer in the first
person. Walk around, listen and note down
good sentences and any mistakes you hear to
highlight afterwards in feedback.
MA Go through the four bullet points first
and elicit the questions needed (How did
the Recycled Orchestra start? What was your
role? What has happened to the Recycled
Orchestra? Are you happy that you’re getting
new instruments?).
Extra idea: Students think of an
embarrassing story (something that
happened to them or to someone they
know). Give them time to write a few
notes and encourage them to sequence
the things that happened using the past
simple, past continuous and past perfect
simple. They then walk around the room
in a class mingle and tell each other their
stories. When the laughter has died down,
get feedback and vote for the funniest
stories.
Lesson 3 The busker pp30–31
Aims
The focus of this lesson is the use of modal
auxiliary verbs to make deductions and conclusions
about past events. Students also listen to a story
about a classical violinist who became a busker for
a day in the Washington subway and offer their
opinions about different types of music in the
Vocabulary section.
You first!
Students look at the photo. Elicit what’s happening
by asking questions: Where are they? What are
they doing? Have you ever done this? Would you
like to do it?
Speaking
1 Students work in groups to discuss the
questions, then compare with another group.
Check their ideas and opinions in feedback.
Listening 1
2
PREDICT Students guess the answers to
the questions. Get a few suggestions from the
class, but don’t confirm if they’re correct or not.
MA Allow weaker students to make guesses in
pairs.
3
Play the recording for students to listen
and check if their predictions were correct.
Elicit personal responses from the class. Were
they surprised by the story? Do they agree
about how important context is?
1.22
Answers
1 Joshua Bell, the world-famous classical
violinist, earned $32 for playing the
violin in a Washington metro station.
2 About an hour
Transcript
woman You aren’t listening!
man
Yes, I am. I mean, I was. Anyway – you
were talking about a busker?
woman Yes, I was, but he wasn’t an ordinary
busker.
man
OK, OK. Start from the beginning.
Again. If you must. What was so
special about this incident? It’s just a
story about a busker, right?
woman Well, yes. And no.
man
I think you’d better explain, ’cause
I don’t get it.
woman OK. This is the situation. Imagine that
you are in the Washington metro
station and this guy comes along and
he gets out his violin. Then he starts to
play.
man
He starts to play. And?
woman He plays classical music.
man
He plays classical music. So what? That
isn’t a story.
woman Hold on! He plays classical music for
at least an hour. And a lot of people
come past.
man
How many? I mean, more or less.
woman I can tell you exactly. It was 1,079
people.
man
Somebody counted?
woman Yes. The Washington Post.
man
The Washington Post? The
newspaper?
woman Yes.
man
Well, at least he must have made a lot
of money, right?
woman Wrong. He made just over 32 dollars.
And only seven people stopped to
listen.
man
That isn’t great, is it? He can’t have
been very good.
Unit 3
73
Grammar Past conclusions
Listening 2
4 Students match the sentences and meanings of
the modal verbs. Ask extra concept-checking
questions if needed:
6
When are the sentences about? (the past)
Are we completely sure about what
happened? (no)
Why do we use words like ‘can’t have’, ‘could
have’, ‘must have’ and ‘might have’? (to guess
about the past)
Which modal verbs show more certainty?
(must have, can’t have)
Answers
a) 1, 3
b) 2, 4
5 Look at the examples in the box, then
brainstorm with the class a list of other
possible reasons why Joshua Bell earned so
little money when he busked. Students work
in pairs and formulate conclusions using the
modal verbs. Walk around and correct any
grammar mistakes.
Suggested answers
He can’t have played very well.
He can’t have played loudly.
The people might / could have been in a
hurry.
He might / could / must have played very
quietly.
People might not have liked his music.
He can’t have been very good.
Tip: When students make mistakes, indicate
something is wrong and try to elicit selfcorrection or peer correction rather than
just telling them. You could do this by
asking questions (When was it? Are you
sure?) or echoing the sentence back and
pausing at the word they got wrong (He
can’t have play?). This gets them more
involved in the learning process, helps
them analyse things, is more memorable
and gives you the opportunity to praise
them for their correction.
74
Unit 3
Give students a moment to read the
questions so they know what to listen for. Play
the recording and pause as necessary.
1.23
Answers
1 Joshua Bell
2 Because of a conversation he had with
a journalist about context.
3 Does it matter where you hear
something or see something?
4 Where and when you see or hear
something
Transcript
woman Oh, he was good, he was very good.
His name is Joshua Bell, one of the
best violinists in the whole world.
man
Joshua Bell! Why was he playing in a
metro station, then?
woman It was because of a conversation
he had with a reporter from The
Washington Post. They were talking
about context.
man
Context? What do you mean?
woman Well, their question was: Does it
matter where you hear something
or see something? For example, if
the Mona Lisa was on the wall in
someone’s bedroom, would people
say ‘It’s beautiful’? If you hear hip-hop
music in a concert hall, is it exciting?
man
Oh, I see and if you hear beautiful
classical music in the wrong place
– like a metro station – is it still
beautiful?
woman Yes, that’s it, exactly. Joshua Bell said
it’s all about context.
man
Mm, I guess he was right.
woman Looks like it. When he plays in
a concert hall, people pay him
thousands of dollars. But in the metro
station, he got exactly 32 dollars.
Background note
Joshua David Bell is an American violinist
and conductor. He was born on 9
December, 1967, in Bloomington, Indiana.
He started taking violin lessons at the
age of four and by the age of 14, he had
played with the Philadelphia Orchestra.
Joshua made his Carnegie Hall debut in
1985, at the age of 17, with the St Louis
Symphony. He has since performed with
many of the world’s major orchestras
and conductors and he won a Grammy
Award in 1993. He also performed the solo
part on John Corigliano’s Oscar-winning
soundtrack for the film The Red Violin and
was also featured in Ladies in Lavender.
Joshua is also well known for the
‘Washington Post experiment’, when
he put on a baseball cap and played as
an incognito busker in a metro subway
station, L’Enfant Plaza, in Washington,
DC, on 12 January, 2007. The experiment
was videotaped on a hidden camera; of
over 1,000 people who passed by, only a
handful stopped to listen to him, and only
one recognised him. For his performance,
Bell collected $32.17 from 27 passers-by
(excluding $20 from the passer-by who
recognised him). Three days before, he had
earned considerably more playing the same
repertoire at a concert. The Washington
Post posted the video on YouTube and a
feature-length documentary, Find Your
Way: A Busker’s Documentary, chronicled
Bell’s experience at https://www.youtube.
com/watch?v=1arAYoKE2VY.
7
VIDEO OPTION Students record themselves
telling the story of Joshua Bell busking. When
they’ve finished, they can upload the clip to
YouTube or just walk around the class and
show each other their video clips.
Tip: Sometimes retelling a story several times
is a very effective way of improving.
When we do things for the first time, we
often make mistakes, so tell students to
watch their videos, pick up any mistakes
and make little changes the next time.
Vocabulary Saying what you like
8 Students talk in pairs or small groups about the
different types of music in the box. Do a quick
survey afterwards to find out which is the most
popular.
MA Pair a weaker student with a stronger
student to encourage discussion.
9 Write the word music in the middle of the
board and make a vocabulary network or a
word fountain with the class. Elicit as many
different types of music as you can. Repeat the
words with the class to practise pronunciation.
Try and find at least one person for every type
of music on the board.
10 Draw a scale from 1 to 10 on the board and
elicit the extremes from the list to go at either
end (ie I’m crazy about at 1, I can’t stand at
10). You could also draw emoticons to indicate
‘like’ or ‘dislike’. Students should arrange
the phrases on the scale. There are some in
the middle of the scale (eg I don’t really like
and I’m not really into) that are very similar in
meaning, so as long as students put them in
roughly the correct order, accept their answers.
Suggested answers
1f 2j 3e 4d 5i
9 b 10 a
6g
7h
8c
11 Students talk in groups about music using
the phrases from 10. Encourage them to give
reasons for their opinions.
Extra idea: Play a game of ‘Juke Box Jury’
with the class. Play different styles of music
and have the class vote for their favourites.
Speaking
12 Read the four statements together as a class
and tell students to look at the example. They
then rewrite the sentences in a personalised
way. Encourage them to use the phrases from
10 and to add an explanatory sentence for
each one, as in the example.
13 Put students in pairs to compare their answers
to 12 and tell each other what they like or
dislike. They should explain why and ask extra
questions.
14 MINI-TALK This could be done for
homework or in class. Give students time to
find out background information online about
their chosen song. Remind them to use the
ideas in the box; ideally, they should give their
talk using just brief notes. Monitor and choose
two or three students to give their talk to the
whole class.
Unit 3
75
Music link
Ask students if any of them know either of these
pieces of music. Try to choose the piece that
fewest students are familiar with so that as many
of them as possible hear it for the first time. If any
students play the violin, ask them if they’ve ever
played either of these pieces.
Encourage students to give their honest opinions
of the music. For those who said they didn’t like
classical music, has listening to this changed their
mind?
Everyday English p32
Complimenting someone’s performance
1
Answers
1 A guitar
2 People have given money to a busker.
2
Culture note
• Méditation de Thaïs is a piece for solo
violin and orchestra written by French
composer Jules Massenet (1842–1912)
as part of his opera Thaïs in 1894.
The eponymous heroine is reflecting
on advice given to her by a monk and
deciding to leave her life of luxury and
pleasure to find salvation. It is in the key
of D major and is around five minutes
long.
• Jean Sibelius (1865–1957) was a Finnish
violinist and composer. He wrote his
Violin Concerto in 1904, but was
unhappy with its first performance
and revised it substantially. The new
version premiered in October 1905
and is the only concerto that Sibelius
wrote. It was originally dedicated to
the noted violinist Willy Burmester,
but he was unable to attend either of
the premieres and was so offended
that the performances still went ahead
without him that he refused to play the
concerto ever again. It is written in the
key of D minor and is considered a very
challenging solo violin piece.
Take a break
Try to find a piece of music to play that everyone
wants to hear. If they can’t reach consensus, go
with the majority, but make a list of other songs
to play in the next few classes. Encourage them to
choose a wide variety of music styles. Alternatively,
give them five minutes to listen to a song of their
choice on their mp3 players or phones, providing
they have headphones!
76
Unit 3
GUESS Students make guesses about the
photo and compare ideas with a partner.
1.24 6 Play the video or recording for
students to check if their predictions in 1 were
right. Try to avoid pausing at this stage, as
students only need to get the gist first time
around.
Transcript
marianne I’m really enjoying your music. Thank
you so much for letting me listen to
you.
charlie
My pleasure. I’m glad you’re enjoying
it.
marianne Absolutely! Your last song was great.
You’re great.
charlie
Oh, really? Do you think so?
marianne Yeah. I mean, like, you’re amazing!
charlie
Well, it’s kind of you to say that, but ...
marianne Honestly, you rock. You really rock!
charlie
I’m grateful for that. Thank you.
marianne No, really! I mean you’re just incredible
– I mean you’ve made my day.
charlie
Have I? Wow.
marianne Yeah, you deserve a real pat on the
back.
charlie
Right. OK. Well, thank you again. I
appreciate that.
marianne Yeah. You were good. Really good.
High five!
charlie
High five? OK, well, thank you, that’s
enough.
marianne Oh, come on. You’re honestly the
best musician I …
charlie
OK. Hold it, Mrs ... uh? Look, thank
you for the kind words, but that’s
enough. I can’t take any more
compliments.
marianne Oh, you’re just being modest. OK,
it’s just I’ve never heard anyone as …
charlie
No more compliments, OK? I can’t
take it any more.
marianne OK, I’m sorry. I tend to get a bit overenthusiastic. But you’re just so good!
charlie
marianne
charlie
marianne
charlie
marianne
charlie
Yes, well …
And I feel very emotional. But that’s
because you are …
OK, stop!
OK. I’ve stopped. I think. Yes, I have
Well, that’s good.
OK. Sorry, don’t mind me. I’m just
going to listen.
Thanks again.
3 Students do the activity, then watch or listen
again to check their answers. Encourage them
to correct the false ones.
Answers
1 True
2 False (He doesn’t like too many
compliments.)
3 Don’t know
4 Don’t know
5 True
Tip: Give students control of the audio / video
player from time to time so they can pause
and replay the parts they’d like to listen
to. This creates learner autonomy and gets
them more involved in the lesson.
4
Students write the sentences in the correct
column. You could also ask them to come up
and write the answers on the board.
Answers
Compliments: b, g, h, i, j, k, l
Responses: a, c, d, e, f
5 Students discuss in pairs which statements are
more formal / informal.
Answers
Expressions b, j and k are more informal
(especially b and k, which are very
colloquial).
6
Students act the conversation out with
a partner. Encourage them to mimic the
intonation from the recording. Let them
have several attempts at it, to see if they can
remember a bit more each time. Ask one or
two stronger pairs to perform their version for
the class.
MA Give weaker students a minute or two to
read the transcript of the conversation first.
7 Show the video or play the recording again
so students can compare their conversations.
Were they similar or really different?
8
1.25 Encourage students to guess what
the woman did next. Elicit their ideas, then
play the recording so they can see if their
predictions were correct.
Answer
She started calling people to listen to him.
Transcript
woman How long have you been busking?
man
A few months.
woman And you do it because you love it?
man
Because I love it? Because it’s fun to
stand out in the cold weather? Because
it’s great when people walk past and
don’t even listen? Because … ?
woman So if you don’t like it so much, why do
you do it?
man
’Cause I’m a student. In college. I have
to eat. I have to earn money to eat,
you know.
woman Oh, but you were great, you were just
so good.
man
Please, don’t start again.
woman Hey, I have an idea. I said I have an
idea.
man
Yeah?
woman Why don’t I tell everyone how great
you are? Start playing again. Come
on over, everyone! Come and listen
to this amazing young singer. He’s
amazing, the best around, he’s … hey,
what’s your name, anyway?
man
Charlie.
woman He’s Charlie!
Extra idea: Have a class discussion about
the situation. Do students think the woman
was over-the-top in her compliments? Was
the busker being over-sensitive? Who do
they identify most with?
Unit 3
77
9
ROLE-PLAY Students think of other
compliments and do their best to embarrass
each other. You could also make it into a
game. One student pays compliments; the
other student has to respond politely without
laughing!
1.26 Play the recording for students to
10 P
underline the stressed syllable in each word.
To make it more visual, do word-stress drilling
and show the pronunciation by tapping out
the beat and raising your hand on stressed
syllables.
Answers
emotional, enthusiastic, famous grateful,
incredible
11 P Students work out the answers in pairs,
then think of two more words for each
category.
MA Challenge stronger students or early
finishers to think of a two-syllable word with
the stress on the second syllable (eg invest,
career).
Answers
1 grateful
2 decisive, enthusiastic
3 emotional, incredible
12 P Students work in pairs or groups of three
to work out where the word stress is in each
of the words. You could also make word cards
and cards with stress patterns. Give each
group a set of cards and ask them to match
the words to the correct stress pattern. This
offers variety, is easy to correct (just by moving
the card into another place) and is a visual,
auditory and kinaesthetic activity. Encourage
students to group the words according to their
endings.
Answers
-ic
academic, altruistic, energetic,
pathetic,
-ve aggressive
-ble amiable, disagreeable, horrible,
dislikeable, likeable, loveable, reliable
-gry angry
-cy bankruptcy, efficiency
-ty insensitivity, legibility
78
Unit 3
-phy biography, geography, philosophy,
photography
-gy biology, futurology, psychology
-ous jealous
1.27 Play the recording so students
13 P
can check their answers. Then elicit the links
between the spelling and the stress tendencies.
Check together and do some repetition drilling
to practise pronunciation. If necessary, elicit or
explain the meanings of the words.
Answers
a) penultimate syllable
b) penultimate syllable
c) syllable before the -able or -ible ending
d) two syllables before the end
Tip: Although word stress is often fairly
predictable because of the part of
speech, number of syllables and type of
suffix, try not to tell students they are
rules! There are often exceptions, and
students might overgeneralise. Instead,
it’s best to talk about ‘strong tendencies’
and tell students to approach every new
word on its own terms.
Extra idea: To review and reinforce the
new vocabulary, students choose five of the
words and write definitions for them. They
then describe their words to a partner, who
has to listen to the definition and guess the
correct word.
Vocabulary plus p64
Household tasks
1 Write do and make as column headings on the
board. Divide the class into two teams and ask
a student from each team alternately to come
to the board. Read out one of the words /
phrases from the box and ask the student
to write it in the correct column. They win 2
points if they do it without help and 1 point
if they need to ask their team’s advice or be
corrected by their team. The team with the
most points at the end is the winner.
Answers
do: the dusting, the ironing, the washing
up, the laundry, the cleaning, the dishes,
the hoovering / vacuuming
make: a cup of coffee, a mess,
arrangements, breakfast*, a mistake, the
bed
You may sometimes hear breakfast used
with do, as in Let’s do breakfast tomorrow,
especially in the USA, but this is generally
confined to businesspeople arranging
meetings.
2 Quickly elicit the verbs to fill the gaps, then
ask three students to read the completed
sentences aloud.
Answers
1 Put 2 take
Answer
music
6 Students classify the collocations shown on the
board.
Answers
1 live music, background music
2 listen to music, compose music, play
music, face the music
3 music industry
4 music to my ears
7 Students work in pairs to write their
definitions. They then work with another pair,
reading out their definitions for the other pair
to guess the phrases.
MA Stronger students could write definitions
for all eight phrases.
3 collect
3 Ask students which words are more common
in which variety of English.
Answers
a) trash, garbage
b) rubbish
4 Students work in pairs to discuss how
household tasks are shared out in their homes.
Do a class survey and ask if students think that
domestic chores are distributed fairly or not.
Collocations
5 Explain that a concordance is a list produced
by a computer that shows every example of
a particular word used a body of writing. The
featured word is usually printed in a different
colour or aligned in the middle of the line (as
in this activity). Tell students that they need to
look on either side of the gap to find the words
that the missing word collocates with. Elicit the
collocations for the gaps and write them on
the board (ie listen to _____ , compose _____ ,
live _____ , background _____ , play _____ ,
_____ industry, _____ to my ears, face the
_____). Students identify the word that’s
missing from all the collocations.
Phrasal verbs make
8
2.23 Give pairs five minutes to match the
phrases to the correct gaps in the conversation,
then play the recording for them to check.
Answers
1c 2a 3d
4b
9 Elicit the phrases with make from 8 and write
them on the board – make off with, make it up
to, make it out, make do with. Students then
work in pairs to write their story, following the
instructions. Their final story should include
one sentence for each phrase.
Unit 3
79
4
UNIT
FOCUS
Is it art?
GRAMMAR: articles, comparison; superlative sentences
VOCABULARY: art and pictures; people in the arts; adjectives
FUNCTIONS: discussing opinions and making judgements
Introduction p33
Answers
1 calligraphy, graffiti, graphic design,
installation, printmaking, sculpture,
statue, tapestry, video
2 collage, drawing, landscape, painting,
photograph, portrait, sketch
3 chalk, charcoal, chisel, paintbrush
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to introduce the topic
of art, especially street art, and to teach students
related vocabulary.
You first!
Show some photos of graffiti; students discuss
the questions in pairs or small groups. Check their
ideas in feedback and ask additional questions
(eg Is it art or just vandalism? Should street art be
allowed? Why? / Why not?).
3 Students compare with a partner and think of
extra words for each category. Get feedback
and add extra ideas to the board.
Extra idea: Play a spelling-bee game to
review the vocabulary. Ask students to
close their books and dictate the words in a
random order. Students listen and write the
words with the correct spelling. They then
compare their answers with a partner and
check answers in feedback.
1 Students work in pairs or small groups to talk
about the photos and give reasons for their
opinions. Get feedback and find out which
piece of street art is the most / least popular.
Culture notes
• The Istanbul photo is of a work by
Brazilian street artist Claudio Ethos. He
specialises in murals and has painted
many large images in his home town of
São Paulo.
• The Santa Monica photo is by Agata
Oleksiak, a Polish artist known
professionally as ‘Crocheted Olek’
or just ‘Olek’. Her works include
sculptures, installations (such as the
crocheted bicycle pictured), inflatables
and fibre art.
• The London photo is by Banksy (see
page 35).
2
80
Write the three categories on the board
and ask students to come and write the words
from the box in the correct category. Repeat
the words together to practise pronunciation.
As a follow-up, students say the words and
underline the stressed syllables. Ask students
which words are very similar in their own
language and which are very different.
Unit 4
to describe people; adjectives to describe the arts
4
To introduce the topic and set the
scene, show a photo of an example of Banksy’s
street art and ask extra questions (eg Do you
recognise the picture? Who painted it? What
does he or she look like? Is Banksy a man or a
woman? Would you buy a picture by Banksy?).
1.28
Play the recording for students to listen and
answer the questions. Pause as necessary and
get feedback.
Answers
1 Banksy is a graffiti artist, a political
activist and a painter.
2 He is a street artist and he makes films
too.
3 He is most famous for his paintings
on buildings in cities all over the world
– especially in Britain and the United
States.
4 Banksy’s picture is the maid sweeping
rubbish under a cloth.
Transcript
One of the most famous artists in the world is
someone called Banksy. You’ve never heard of
him (or is it her?)? Well, let me explain.
Banksy is a graffiti artist, a political activist and
a painter. Oh, and he makes films, too. He is
most famous for his painting in cities all over
the world – especially in Britain and the United
States. He wins prizes, too.
But is he ‘he’? The thing about Banksy is no
one really knows who he is. Some say he is
an Englishman called Robin Gunningham,
but others think he is a woman. Or perhaps
he is really about 14 different artists. Banksy’s
identity is one of the greatest mysteries of
contemporary art.
Many people love Banksy’s work. You can see
it on walls and bridges in cities like London and
New York – or on buildings in New Orleans
after Hurricane Katrina. For example, in one of
his London paintings, a maid sweeps rubbish
under a cloth.
Other people do not like what he does.
They think the work of Banksy is just graffiti
– like any other angry child or adolescent.
It’s vandalism. It destroys buildings. And so
Banksy’s street art is often destroyed.
Background note
‘Banksy’ is the pseudonym of an English
graffiti artist, political activist, film director
and painter. His satirical street art and
subversive graffiti and social commentary
have been featured on streets, walls and
bridges of cities throughout the world.
Banksy does not sell photographs or
reproductions of his street graffiti, but his
art has been sold at auction houses such as
Sotheby’s for huge sums of money. After
Christina Aguilera bought pictures for
£25,000, in October 2006, a set of Kate
Moss paintings sold in Sotheby’s London
for £50,400, setting an auction record for
Banksy’s work. The six silk-screen prints,
featuring the model painted in the style of
Andy Warhol’s Marilyn Monroe pictures,
sold for five times their estimated value.
His success and influence on other street
artists has been called ‘the Banksy effect’.
Banksy’s first film, Exit Through the Gift
Shop, billed as ‘the world’s first street-art
disaster movie’, made its debut at the
2010 Sundance Film Festival. The film was
released in the UK on 5 March 2010 and
was nominated for the Academy Award
for Best Documentary. In 2014, he was
awarded Person of the Year at the 2014
Webby Awards.
Banksy’s name and identity remain
unknown, but there has been speculation
that Banksy is a woman, or that Banksy is a
team of several artists.
5
VIDEO OPTION Set the video activity for
homework. Ask students to bring to class their
films of interesting graffiti they found in their
town and share with each other. Remind them
that they’re not expected to find major works
of art, just any examples of graffiti.
6
FINISH IT Write the sentence starters on the
board for students to complete in their own
words.
7 Students compare their ideas with a partner
and give reasons for their opinions. Do they
agree or disagree?
Lesson 1 Mystery attacks
pp34–35
Aims
The focus of this lesson is the definite and
indefinite article. Students also learn about people
in the arts in the Vocabulary section and read
about mystery attacks on famous pieces of art.
They have the opportunity to discuss controversial
examples of modern art, too.
Warm-up
Do an online image search and print out some
pictures of famous pieces of art. Cut the pictures
in half, mix them up and give each student half
a picture. Students walk around the room and
describe their picture to other people. Remind
them they’re not allowed to show anyone, just
describe the image. They have to listen to the
descriptions and find the person they think has the
other half of their picture.
Unit 4
81
Tip: The warm-up activity on page 35 is
a good way of promoting learner
interaction and speaking, and also
changing pairs. When students find
the person who has the other half of
their picture, ask them to sit down next
to their new partner. This enables you
to change seating and manage the
classroom in a game and also helps to
move problematic partners.
Speaking and reading
1
2
EVERYBODY UP! Students walk around
the room in a class mingle and find out
information about each other. They then report
back to the whole class and ask extra questions
to promote further discussion. Were there any
categories with only one student (or even no
students)? Ask for ideas as to why that might be.
GUESS Students make predictions about
the photo. Have they seen it before? What’s
the connection between the sculpture and the
writing ‘Move this tin can’?
Background note
Scallop is a sculpture dedicated to English
composer Benjamin Britten, who used to
walk along the beach where the sculpture
is located. Created from stainless steel by
Suffolk-based artist Maggi Hambling, it
stands 15 feet (4.6 metres) high, and was
unveiled in November 2003. The sculpture
is made up of two interlocking scallop
shells; each one is broken. People are
encouraged to sit on it and watch the sea.
The sculpture is controversial in the local
area, and some people think it has spoiled
the beach. It has also been vandalised with
graffiti and paint on 13 separate occasions..
3 Set a short time limit so students read for
gist and don’t worry too much about new
vocabulary. They then read and check if their
predictions were correct.
Answers
1 A sculpture named Scallop by Maggi
Hambling
2 On a beach in Aldeburgh, England
82
Unit 4
3 The people of Aldeburgh asked an artist
to put it there to commemorate local
composer Benjamin Britten.
4 Explain to students that these are the answers
to questions that they have to formulate.
Do the first one together as an example to
illustrate that each one may have several
possible questions (eg Where did Britten live?
Where is ‘Scallop’?). Students work in pairs to
decide which four words / phrases to choose
and write questions. When they’ve finished,
they work with new partners to ask their
questions and see if they get the right answers.
You could also do this as a class game. Put
each word / phrase on a different card and give
each group a set of cards. Students take turns
to pick a card and ask the right question to get
the answer on the card.
MA Stronger students can work alone to write
questions and can choose more than four
words / phrases.
Suggested answers
1 Where was Britten from? / Where did
Britten live? / Where is Scallop?
2 Which composer of classical music lived
in Aldeburgh? / Who is the sculpture
dedicated to?
3 Where is Aldeburgh? / Which country
did Britten come from?
4 Has the sculpture been taken away, or
is it still there?
5 Who created the sculpture? / Who did
the people of Aldeburgh ask to create
something in Britten’s memory?
6 What does the graffiti say?
7 Who were the attackers?
8 What is the sculpture called?
9 Did everyone like it? / What was the
reaction to the sculpture?
Extra ideas: Put students in pairs. Student
A is a journalist who wants to know more
about the history of the sculpture. Student
B is an expert about the history of Scallop.
Student A interviews student B about the
sculpture.
Students find out more about Maggi
Hambling and give a short presentation of
her life and work.
Grammar Articles
Answers
1 nothing (rule 4) 2 a (rule 1) 3 nothing
(rule 4) 4 nothing (rule 5) 5 the (rule 2)
6 an (rule 1) 7 nothing (rule 5)
8 a (rule 1) 9 an (rule 1) 10 an (rule 1)
11 The (rule 2) 12 the (rule 2)
13 nothing (rule 5) 14 The (rule 2)
5 Students complete the extracts with the correct
article. They can look back at the text to help
them if necessary.
Answers
1 a 2 the 3 Some 4 the 5 nothing;
nothing 6 nothing 7 the 8 nothing
6 Students work in pairs, look back at the
sentences and work out the grammar rules.
Elicit that where a name includes the definite
article (eg the United States, the Mona Lisa),
we don’t add another one.
Answers
1 a 2 the
3 some
4 nothing
5 nothing
Extra idea: Focus on pronunciation. Model
the weak schwa in indefinite articles /ə/ and
the different pronunciation of the definite
article if it’s followed by words that begin
with a vowel: /ðiː/:
the car /ðə kɑː/
the boy /ðə bɔɪ/
the apple /ðiː ˈæpl/ the elephant / ðiː ˈelɪfənt/
• What vowel sound does ‘the’ have
when it’s followed by a noun that
begins with a consonant? (/ə/)
• What sound does ‘the’ have when it’s
followed by a noun that begins with a
vowel? (/iː/)
You could also point out the /j/ sound for
vowel-to-vowel linking:
the apple /ðiːˈjæpl/ the elephant / ðiːˈjelɪfənt/
7
Students work in pairs to describe Scallop.
Ask extra questions: Do you like the sculpture?
How would you feel if it was put on a beach
near you?
MA Weaker students may need to re-read
the article on page 34 to help them; stronger
students should attempt it with their books
closed.
8
1.29 Students complete the gaps. They can
look back at the grammar rules in 6 to help
them. Then play the recording so they can
check their answers. Check as a class, eliciting
which rule applies in each gap.
MA Remind weaker students that an is used
before nouns beginning with a vowel or silent h.
Vocabulary People in the arts
9
To introduce the activity, ask students what
we call someone who makes sculptures (a
sculptor). They then look at the words in the
box and complete the mind map. You may
want to tell them that one word (director) can
go in more than one category. Encourage them
to add extra words if they can. Tell them that
the collective term for these things is the arts
/ðiˈjɑːts/. Ask students which words are very
similar in their own language and which are
very different.
Answers
art: photographer, potter
theatre: director, playwright
film: cameraman, director
literature: poet, writer
music: composer, conductor, singer
dance: ballerina, choreographer, dancer
10 Ask students to think of a famous person from
each category (eg film – Steven Spielberg).
Students can play this game in pairs, groups or
as a class.
MA If weaker students struggle to describe
the people they’ve chosen, help them with the
necessary vocabulary.
Extra idea: Students ask yes / no questions
to guess the famous person. Give an
example to model the activity:
a Is this person in music?
b
No.
a Are they in film?
b
Yes.
a Is it a famous director?
b
Yes.
a Are they old?
b
Yes.
a Is it a man?
b
Yes.
Unit 4
83
a
You first!
b
Elicit the difference between graffiti and pieces
of public art (public art is done with official
permission). Students discuss statues and pieces of
public art in pairs. Where are they located? Who
created them? Do you like them? Do a class survey
and find out the best-known and most popular
pieces of art.
Was he an actor a long time ago?
Yes.
a Is he famous for westerns?
b
Yes.
a Is it Clint Eastwood?
b
Yes!
They get a bonus point for guessing in
fewer than ten questions.
Speaking
Reading
11 Students discuss the works of art in pairs and
decide who should win the prize. Tell them to
give reasons for their opinions.
1
Background notes
• Rachel Whiteread is an English artist,
born in 1963. She was the first woman
to win the Turner Prize (in 1993). Many
of her works are casts of ordinary
domestic objects.
• Chris Ofili is an English painter, born in
1968. He won the Turner Prize in 1998
and many of his works include elephant
dung. The title of this work comes from
a song by Bob Marley and the Wailers.
EXPLORE ONLINE
Students look up information for homework or in
class using their smartphones or tablets. Although
there may be other similarities that they identify,
the obvious one is that both artists won the Turner
Prize.
Extra idea: Students prepare a short
presentation with background information
about an artist, their favourite work by
that artist and why they like it. Encourage
them to include pictures to make their
presentations more visually attractive
and interesting. They then make their
presentations in small groups.
Lesson 2 Mystery man pp36–37
Aims
The focus of this lesson is comparisons and
adjectives to describe people. Students read about
the maquettes of the Turner Prize-winning sculptor
Antony Gormley and also complete a poem in the
Writing section about statues and other works of
art.
84
Unit 4
GUESS Tell students they’re going to do a
dictionary race. Put them in small groups and
give them dictionaries. They have to find the
eight words and write down the definitions.
The first team to finish wins the game.
If they don’t have dictionaries, they can use
online dictionaries via their smartphones or
tablets. Get feedback, then ask them to guess
the connection between the words. Don’t
confirm or refute any of their guesses at this
stage.
2 Set a short time limit so students read quickly.
They should then check if their predictions
were right. What things were interesting or
surprising?
Answer
All the words relate to sculptures made by
Gormley.
Background note
The English sculptor Antony Gormley was
born on 30 August, 1950. His best-known
works include The Angel of the North near
Newcastle in the north of England, Another
Place on Crosby Beach near Liverpool, and
Event Horizon, which is made up of 31
life-size figures located in London, around
Madison Square in New York City, and
in São Paulo, Brazil. Gormley’s auction
record is £3,401,250 for a maquette of
The Angel of the North, set at Christie’s,
London, in October 2011. He has won the
Turner Prize, the Laurence Olivier Award for
Outstanding Achievement in Dance (for a
set design for a ballet), the Obayashi Prize
in 2012, and the 2013 Praemium Imperiale
laureate for sculpture.
The Angel of the North is a contemporary
sculpture, completed in 1998. It is a steel
sculpture of an angel, 20 metres (66 feet)
tall, with wings measuring 54 metres
(177 feet) across. The wings do not stand
straight sideways, but are angled 3.5
degrees forward; Gormley did this to create
‘a sense of embrace’.
Answers
1 Five from: Crosby, London, New York,
São Paulo, Austria, Norway, Newcastle
2 The statue of Christ at Corcovado in Rio
de Janeiro, Brazil
3 Another Place is a work situated on
the beach at Crosby, near Liverpool,
England. The statues disappear under
the waves when the tide comes in, then
stand free when the tide is out.
4 His assistants wrap him in clingfilm,
then wrap cloth and then wet plaster
around that. When the plaster is hard,
they cut him out of it. The cast is then
put back together and covered in lead
or fibreglass or iron.
5 ‘I simply use my body as a starting
point,’ he says, ‘to see how man and
nature interact. It’s as if [the men in his
work] are both watching and being
watched.’
3 Students talk about the statues in small
groups. Encourage them to use the adjectives
in the box. Walk around, listen and note down
any other adjectives and good sentences you
hear. Highlight nice ideas and good use of
English in feedback, and find out whether the
class agreed on their descriptions.
Tip: Always try to monitor unobtrusively
when students do speaking activities.
They need to know you’re there,
because this keeps them on task, but if
you get too close, it can disrupt learner
interaction and pairwork, as they tend
to forget about their partner and talk
to you instead! Be available to help
and near enough to monitor, but keep
a distance so they work things out
together.
6
4 Remind students to figure out the meaning of
the vocabulary through contextual inference
and clues in the sentences. They then compare
ideas with a partner. Ask one student to
supply an example sentence for each word.
Write them on the board and invite peer
commentary.
Answers
hugely popular, the tide comes in, the
tide goes out, they disappear beneath the
waves
sea phrases: the tide comes in / goes out;
they disappear beneath the waves; rising
out of the waves; stand free of the water
MA Stronger students can do all six words.
Answers
shabbier: looking older and in worse condition
protect: to keep someone or something
safe
obviously: in a way that is easy to
understand or see
wrap: to cover or surround something with
something else
a starting point: a place where something
begins
critics: people who give their opinion on
something, usually in the arts
5 Students find the information. Put them in
pairs and encourage them to skim-read quickly.
Set a time limit and see if they can beat the
clock!
TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE Students match
the words to make phrases from the article.
They then look back at the text to check. Give
an example of phrases about the sea (eg rising
out of the waves) and ask students to find
other examples.
EXPLORE ONLINE
This can be done as homework or in class.
Students search for information online with their
smartphones / tablets. Do a quick survey to find
the class’s favourite Gormley sculpture.
Grammar Comparison
7
SEARCH AND THINK Students work in
pairs to find the answers in the article. Ask
extra concept-checking questions to check
their understanding of the function and form
of the grammar:
• How many things are the sentences
describing? (two)
Unit 4
85
What do the words in bold do? (They make
a degree of comparison between the two
things in each sentence.)
• Which words shows a much more
noticeable difference? (considerably, a lot)
• Which words show smaller differences?
(a little bit, nearly)
• Which words are followed by a comparative
adjective? (considerably, a lot, a little)
• Which word is followed by ‘as + adjective
+ as’? (nearly)
To review the comparisons, students walk
around the class and find someone who is
considerably / a lot taller or shorter than they
are. They then find someone who is a little
taller or shorter or someone who is nearly as
tall as them.
•
Answers
1 The Angel of the North is considerably
shabbier than most public art.
2 The Angel of the North is a little bit
smaller than the statue of Christ in Rio
de Janeiro.
3 Gormley is a lot more successful than
the critics.
4 Gormley isn’t nearly as big as The Angel
of the North.
8 Students fill in the gaps with the correct
comparatives. Check answers in feedback.
Answers
a) considerably, a lot
b) nearly
9 Students complete the sentences with the
words in the box. They should check unknown
words in the dictionary and change the
sentences if necessary to ensure they’re still
true (the focus is on the comparative structures
___ taller than and (not) ____ as tall as, not the
works of art).
Answers
a) The Angel of the North is far / much /
significantly taller than Michelangelo’s
statue of David.
The statue of Christ in Rio is slightly
taller than The Angel of the North.
b) The Angel of the North is almost as tall
as the statue of Christ in Rio.
86
Unit 4
Vocabulary Adjectives to describe people
10 This activity can be done as a game. Put
students in pairs. One student says an adjective
from the box; their partner has to say the
opposite. Give them a five-second time limit
for each word to make it more competitive and
fun.
Suggested answers
big – small
cheerful – miserable
crazy – sensible
funny – boring
generous – mean
happy – sad
intelligent – unintelligent / stupid
large – little
noisy – quiet
old – young
rich – poor
tall – short
11 Students work in pairs to make comparisons
about the photo using some of the adjectives
and opposites from 10 (although they can use
other adjectives if they wish). Get feedback
and check their ideas.
Tip: Students often get stuck in an
‘intermediate plateau’, where improvement
is slower and less noticeable. One feature
of this is that they use the same words
again and again instead of expanding
their range of lexis. Try to encourage them
to write down new words and use them
regularly. This helps to reinforce recent
learning and increases their vocabulary,
confidence, momentum and motivation.
Writing
12 Students complete the sentences and the
poem, then compare their ideas with a partner.
MA Weaker students may need help to get
the two sentences correct before they try and
fit them into the poem. Do them together as a
class on the board if necessary.
Answers
1 The tide is out
2 The waves race in.
13 Students make their own poems about statues
or works of art they like, then share in pairs or
small groups.
Lesson 3 Mystery art pp38–39
Aims
Transcript
announcer
maria
russell
The focus of this lesson is superlative sentences
to describe things that are different to all others.
Students also learn adjectives to describe the
arts, listen to the Nat King Cole song Mona Lisa
and practise phrases of disagreement to describe
paintings and sculptures they’ve seen.
maria
russell
maria
russell
Warm-up
Do an image search and print out a series of
random pictures. Ensure you have at least three
pictures for every group and place them face down
on a table so students can’t see them. Put students
in groups of three and ask one student from each
group to come and select three pictures from
the table. Each group has to think of imaginative
connections between the three pictures and
tell a story. Get feedback and vote for the most
imaginative and funniest stories.
maria
russell
maria
russell
maria
russell
Listening 1
1 To introduce the topic, students look at the
photo and talk about the questions together.
Answers
1 It shows an art gallery.
2 All the pictures are empty frames.
2
3
GUESS Students make predictions about
what they’re going to hear and how it’s likely
to be connected to the photo. Elicit their ideas
and get their reactions to the photo and the
lesson title ‘Mystery art’.
Students listen and check if their
predictions were correct. Play and pause
the recording if necessary and go over any
unknown vocabulary, eg invisible, ridiculous,
apparently.
1.30
Answer
A radio show hoax involved an artist who
produces ‘invisible art’.
maria
russell
maria
russell
maria
russell
maria
russell
maria
russell
maria
russell
maria
And now we return to our weekly
arts programme, The Arts Today.
Welcome back to The Arts Today.
What are we going to talk about
now, Russell?
Well, Maria, there’s a new artist
on the scene. Her name is Lana
Newstrom.
Never heard of her.
No, me neither, but she sounds
interesting.
Why?
Well, she does what she calls
‘invisible art’.
What do you mean?
Well, basically her art is invisible.
There’s nothing there.
Nothing? Absolutely nothing?
Nothing at all.
But that’s ridiculous. That’s one of
the most ridiculous things I’ve ever
heard.
Yes, me too. And a lot of people
are really angry about it. I’ve read
hundreds of tweets. We’re getting
thousands of emails. They are
some of the angriest emails we
have ever received. Here’s one:
‘This is the stupidest idea I have
ever come across.’
But if the art is invisible, well, it
isn’t art, is it?
That’s not what she says,
apparently. She says that, sure, we
can’t see anything. But she put a
lot of time into making her art. She
had to think about it. That’s the
art. But we can’t physically see it.
Now I’ve heard everything!
There’s an exhibition of her work.
What work? There is no work.
She wouldn’t agree with you!
Where did you hear about this
artist, Russell?
On a radio programme.
What was it called?
This and That. It’s on CBC.
CBC?
The Canadian Broadcasting
Corporation.
Oh, that explains it!
Unit 4
87
Background note
In September 2014, the CBC radio station
in Canada discussed the invisible art of
Lana Newstrom and claimed that people
were paying thousands of dollars for her
empty paintings. It created a storm of
anger from art studios and critics, but it
was in fact a hoax by the radio-show hosts,
Pat Kelly and Peter Oldring. Many people
fell for it, as the joke was actually quite
believable! Martin Creed and Susan Philipsz
had both recently won the Turner Prize
for empty rooms – Creed’s with the lights
going on and off and Philipsz’s with a folk
song playing in the background. It was in
fact a parody of contemporary art, with the
amusing image of people walking around
galleries looking at nothing, buying invisible
art and proudly showing their friends!
Tip: It’s helpful to pre-teach vocabulary before
students read texts or listen to audio
content, but sometimes it’s also good
to wait and react to students’ questions
afterwards. Don’t tell them what the
words mean straight away, though.
Write the sentence on the board so they
can see the context, and encourage
them to guess the meaning from clues in
the sentence. It may take a few seconds
longer than just telling them, but it
practises helpful strategies that will serve
them well in the future.
4 Students listen again and make notes about
each point. Pause the recording so they have
time to listen and write; they then compare
ideas with a partner.
Answers
1 The art is invisible, there’s nothing there.
2 She put a lot of time into making her art.
She had to think about it. That’s the art.
3 Listeners were very angry about it.
5
88
TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE Elicit the
phrases from the class and draw their
attention to examples of natural English in the
conversation. Quickly go through the questions
as a class. Play the recording again and focus
on the sentence stress and intonation.
Unit 4
Answers
There’s a new artist on the scene, We’re
getting thousands of emails, I’ve read
hundreds of tweets, Now I’ve heard
everything
1 Now I’ve heard everything!
2 It just means ‘a lot’. Native speakers
often use exaggeration and hyperbole
in a funny way to make stories more
interesting (eg ‘I was stuck in traffic this
morning. There were like a million cars
on the road!’ ‘What’s going on outside?
There are like a billion firefighters in
front of the building!’).
Listening 2
6
PREDICT Students work in pairs to guess
the answers to the questions. Elicit their
predictions.
Answers
1 He apologises for the story about the
artist Lana Newstrom on yesterday’s
programme.
2 CBC were responsible for the hoax.
3 The photo was changed in Photoshop.
7
Play the recording for students to
check if their predictions were correct. You
could also check if students fell for the joke too
(ie Did they believe the photo on page 38 was
a genuine exhibition when they first saw it?).
1.31
Transcript
russell
I want to apologise for our story
about the artist Lana Newstrom on
yesterday’s programme. I oh dear.
This is one of my most embarrassing
moments on radio. Ever. One of the
silliest stories we have ever broadcast.
I’m not really sure I can go on.
producer Come on, Russell. You’ve started.
You’d better finish.
russell
My producer is telling me to go on.
So, well, this is it. The artist Lana
Newstrom doesn’t exist. She isn’t
one of the most provocative artists
ever. She’s a fake. A hoax. Everything
about her is false. She was a joke.
I’d better explain. This and That is,
apparently, a satirical programme
producer
russell
on CBC. They do jokes and hoaxes
and fakes. And me, I’m one of
the stupidest people in the world
because I fell for it. I believed it.
Perhaps that’s the end of my career in
broadcasting, perhaps it’s the end of
everything I’ve ever …
Russell! Get a grip. This is a radio
programme, not a visit to the
doctor’s. Keep going. Tell them about
the photograph.
Er, yes. Some people were taken
in by the photograph of people in
an art gallery looking at nothing.
But in actual fact, the picture was
Photoshopped. It was from a real art
exhibition – they just removed the
paintings in Photoshop!
Extra idea: Ask students to read the
transcript and find words or phrases that
mean the following:
causing people to think about interesting
subjects (provocative)
someone who is not who they claim to be
(a fake)
a plan to trick or deceive someone (a hoax)
to believe a joke or trick (to fall for, to be
taken in by something)
control yourself (get a grip)
Grammar Superlative sentences
8 Students complete the sentences with
adjectives in the superlative form. They then
answer the questions and work out the
grammar rules with a partner. You could also
ask extra questions to review the superlative
form:
•
•
How do we make the superlative form of
short adjectives? (adjective + -est)
What about long adjectives (two syllables
or more)? (most + adjective)
Answers
1 silliest 2 most stupid 3 most ridiculous
4 angriest 5 most embarrassing
1 present perfect simple
2 Ever refers to a mixture of both – the
past up until the present.
Extra idea: Use the original hoax (https://
www.youtube.com/watch?v=4-HZBQrT5Hw)
in class as extra listening practice. Create an
activity such as a gap fill, some questions or
a true/false exercise based on it.
9
In small groups, students give their opinions
using superlative adjectives about two of the
works of art listed (No Woman, No Cry; House
(both page 35); or The Angel of the North
(page 36)). Ask extra questions to continue the
discussion:
What do you think of contemporary art?
Should an empty room win the Turner Prize?
Did you like the idea of people admiring and
buying invisible art?
MA Stronger students could also write
comparative sentences comparing the two
works they chose.
Vocabulary Adjectives to describe the arts
10
Students put the adjectives into categories.
Explain that there are no definite answers:
the whole point of the exercise is not to
have perfect answers but to get them talking
about the meaning of words. They might
say, ‘Shocking is not good. I’d put it in the
“It doesn’t make me feel good” category.
Boring is definitely in the “It hurts my brain!”
category,’ etc. Ask students which words are
very similar in their own language and which
are very different.
11 Students compare their categories and ideas in
pairs and give reasons for their opinions.
12 Read through the ‘Did you know?’ section
about the Huichol. Students look at the
painting and give their opinions using
superlative adjectives from 10. Walk around
and note down any good ideas and sentences
and also look out for small mistakes. Get
feedback afterwards and correct.
Tip: We can often guess the mistakes students
are likely to make. With the superlative,
students sometimes add -est to long
adjectives (It’s the stunningest picture I
have ever seen) or forget to use the article
before most (It’s most beautiful thing). Try
to predict typical difficulties and correct in
an encouraging way.
Unit 4
89
Speaking
13 EVERYBODY UP! When students have
chosen their adjectives, they should walk
around the room in a class mingle. They
compare their adjectives about each of
the works of art and give reasons for their
reactions. Conduct class feedback to find out
which adjective was the most used, and in
relation to which work(s) of art.
14 Students have conversations starting with a
sentence containing a superlative. Remind
them to use some of the adjectives to
express their feelings and opinions, as well as
describing the thing itself. Invite a few pairs to
perform their conversations to the class.
MA Weaker students may need a short
preparation time to think up things to say
about their chosen play / film / etc.
15 ROLE-PLAY Students have to disagree with
what their partner says. You could write ways
of disagreeing on the board to help them.
Repeat the phrases in chorus to practise
intonation that shows surprise or amazement:
I’m not sure about that!
I completely disagree.
(I’m afraid) I don’t agree.
That’s an interesting idea, but ...
Do you really think ...?
That’s rubbish! / Nonsense!
You can’t be serious!
No way!
Song link
Students listen and complete the sentences, then
answer the questions. Encourage them to give
their reactions to the song using the superlative
adjectives.
MA Allow weaker students to pause the recording
if necessary to give them time to write.
Answers
Are you warm, are you real, Mona Lisa?
Or just a cold and lonely, lovely work of
art?
90
Unit 4
Culture notes
• Mona Lisa was originally written for the
1950 film Captain Carey, USA. It won
an Academy Award for Best Original
Song in the same year and was number
one for eight weeks.
• Nat King Cole (1919–1965) first made
his name as a jazz pianist, but his soft
baritone voice ensured his popularity for
over three decades. His real name was
Nathaniel Adams Coles, but he used
the stage name Nat Cole and acquired
the nickname ‘King’ whilst performing
at a jazz club, presumably because of
the similarity to the title of the nursery
rhyme Old King Cole. During his career,
he recorded many hit songs (including
several albums in Spanish) and
appeared in many films, sitcoms and TV
shows, including his own show on NBC.
16 Students compare the two works of art. The
Cézanne paintings on pages 68 and 70 are
very similar, so if you’d rather they compared
more disparate works of art, you could either
ask them to find pictures themselves online or
select from pictures you’ve chosen.
Tip: Sometimes you have to choose things
for students and tell them what to
talk about to save time, but try to give
them time to choose things they’re
interested in. This is more personalised
and meaningful and will probably get a
better response.
Take a break
Some students may view this as a bit childish, but
encourage them to give it a go. Some may prefer
to try and stick close to the colours of the original,
but let them use whatever colours they want – the
brighter the better! If two or more students have
chosen the same image, compare the finished
results to see how similar / different they look.
Everyday English p40
Discussing opinions and making
judgements
1
GUESS Provide helpful language for
students. Write It could be, It can’t be, It
might be, It may be and It must be on the
board. Students discuss the photos in pairs
and guess the answers to the questions. Ask
extra questions: What city are they in? What
clues do you have? (The person is not real, so
it could be Madame Tussauds in London. The
target icon on the plane’s wings is from the
Royal Air Force. It’s a Spitfire fighter plane, so it
must be in England.)
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
Background notes
The left-hand photo shows a waxwork of
country and pop music star Taylor Swift at
Madame Tussauds in New York in 2014 (it
has since been updated).
The right-hand photo shows a Spitfire
fighter plane at the Imperial War Museum
in London.
Tip: Take opportunities to review and practise
recently learnt language such as modal
auxiliary verbs to make predictions.
2
Play and pause the recording as
necessary and check answers in feedback.
1.32
Answer
The people are in Madame Tussauds
waxwork museum.
Transcript
man
What do you think of this?
woman I rather like it. It’s quite a good pose.
man
Do you really think so?
woman Why, don’t you?
man
No, I don’t. I think it’s absolutely
ridiculous!
woman That’s a bit extreme.
man
Come on! Look at it.
woman What’s wrong with it?
man
Well, in the first place, it doesn’t look
like her at all.
woman Don’t you think so?
man
No. And look what she’s wearing, for
goodness sake. It’s totally hideous.
woman
man
woman
man
Well, I beg to differ. She looks
incredibly lifelike to me.
Lifelike?
Yes. I think she’s rather lovely. As if she
was living and breathing right in front
of us.
You can’t be serious. Would you have
her in your front room?
I might, yes.
I can see we don’t have the same tastes.
And that’s a surprise? We never agree
about stuff.
True. So let’s agree to disagree, shall
we?
If we have to. But you are completely
wrong, of course.
Honestly! Sometimes I wonder why I
bother with you at all.
Because you like it. Who else do you
have to argue with?
OK. Point taken. Shall we go and get
some lunch?
Only if we go where I want to go.
That’s absurd!
3 Play and pause the recording as necessary to
give students time to listen and write their
answers. Check answers in feedback.
Answers
1 The woman
4 The woman
2 The man 3 The man
5 The woman
4 Students look closely at the photo again
and discuss who it is and which people they
would like to see if they went to Madame
Tussauds. Ask extra questions to promote
more conversation (eg Have you ever been to
Madame Tussauds? Did you like it? Why? /
Why not? Would you like to go in the future?).
Answer
The two people are looking at a waxwork
of a female celebrity, but they don’t say
who. It could be Taylor Swift (in the photo
at the top of the page).
5 Students work in pairs to arrange the
conversation in order. Play the recording again
for them to check. This activity could also be
done with cut-up slips of paper to appeal to
different learning styles and include a visual,
auditory and kinaesthetic focus.
Unit 4
91
MA Weaker students may need to hear the
conversation again before they order it.
Answers
1dW 2bM 3eM 4jW 5aM
6 f M 7 c W 8 i W 9 m M 10 k M
11 g M 12 l W 13 h M
6 Students complete the chart. They can work
in pairs if they like. Check answers in feedback
and elicit other ideas. Note that it could be
argued that some of the answers (eg item l)
should be in the other category. Be flexible if
students can demonstrate sound reasoning for
their decisions.
Answers
giving opinions: d, e, f, i, k
reacting to opinions: a, b, c, g, h, j, l, m
Extra idea: Books closed. Write a correct
and an incorrect example of an adverb +
extreme adjective collocation on the board
(eg It’s absolutely nice! – It’s absolutely
amazing!). Tell students to work with a
partner and to write as many extreme
adjectives as they can. Get feedback and
write the words in a word fountain on the
board.
7 Students decide with a partner which
collocations are strong / not as strong and
mark them in the left-hand column. Ask
students which adverbs are used with extreme
adjectives and which aren’t. They read the
Grammar spot to check.
Answers
a) + b) –
h) – i) –
c) +
d) –
e) +
f) +
g) +
1.33 Explain the activity carefully and
8 P
give an example. There are no words – the
phrases are represented by nonsense syllables
– so students should listen to the beat and
intonation instead to work out which phrase
is being ‘sounded’. Play the first one with the
class and show how it links to the example
in the exercise. Play the remainder of the
recording for students to order the sentences
in the right-hand column. They then compare
their answers with a partner.
92
Unit 4
Answers
1a 2c 3b
8g 9f
4i
5d
6h
7e
9 P Students use their own nonsense syllables
to say the same phrases. They should focus on
the number of syllables and word stress. They’ll
probably go slowly at first, but encourage
them to go more quickly after they get used to
it!
MA Weaker students may get the hang of the
technique more easily if they say the words
first, then ‘translate’ the phrase into nonsense
syllables.
10 ROLE-PLAY Students choose a picture and
do the role-play, using some of the phrases
and collocations they’ve learnt. They can refer
to transcript 1.32 if they need a model. Walk
around, monitor unobtrusively and help if
needed.
Extra ideas: Make sets of 15 extreme
adjective cards featuring the following
words: ancient, astounding, boiling,
exhausted, fantastic, filthy, freezing,
furious, gorgeous, hideous, hilarious, huge,
spotless, starving, tiny.
Put students in groups of three or four.
Give each group a set of cards and tell
them to spread them across the desk in a
random way. Give them a few seconds to
quickly look at the cards.
Tell the students you’re going to
play a word-grab game. Dictate the
corresponding normal adjectives to them
(ie old, surprising, hot, tired, good, dirty,
cold, angry, pretty, ugly, funny, big, clean,
hungry, small). As soon as they hear the
normal adjective, they have to grab the
matching extreme adjective. Tell them not
to be polite! The student with the most
adjectives at the end wins the game.
Students say sentences using ‘adverb +
extreme adjective’ collocations (eg ‘I went
for a 10-kilometre run yesterday and I
was completely exhausted afterwards.’
‘Have you seen Bob’s dog? It’s absolutely
hideous!’).
Vocabulary plus p65
students to read it aloud, checking that they’ve
used the correct form of the missing word in
each gap.
Photography
1 Students write a sentence containing each
word to show that they understand them in a
photographic context.
Answers
One of the great unsolved mysteries in
Britain is that of Lord Lucan.
Lucan disappeared on the night that
someone attacked his wife and killed the
nanny. The identity of the attacker has
remained a mystery, but many people
believe it was Lucan. The mystery
deepened when Lucan’s car was found
near the sea.
Many people and book writers have tried
to solve the mystery, but his whereabouts
remain a mystery to this day.
‘To me,’ says the writer Deborah Klein, ‘it’s
a complete mystery.’
One of life’s little mysteries is why so
many authors have remained interested in
the story.
MA Weaker students could do this in pairs.
2 Students complete the information, then
compare with a partner.
Answers
1 exposure 2 focus 3 swiping / tapping
4 tapping / swiping 5 composition
6 edge 7 angle
Where things are
3 Students work in pairs to come up with as
many combinations as they can in five minutes.
Answers
at the back of the picture / photo, in the
background, behind the, at the bottom
of the picture, in the bottom left-hand /
right-hand corner (of the picture / photo),
in the centre (of the picture / photo), in the
foreground, in the front of the picture /
photo, in front of the, to the left / right of,
in the left-hand / right-hand corner of the
picture / photo, at the top (of the picture /
photo)
4 Students work in pairs to describe a photo for
their partner to draw. If drawing makes some
students nervous, explain that it just has to be
a quick sketch – there are no prizes for art! If
students don’t have any suitable photos on
their phones, let them find one online or in a
book. As long as they don’t show the image to
their partner, that’s fine.
Students compare their drawings / sketches to
the original photo. Are they similar?
Collocations
5 Students scan the story first to identify the root
word that’s missing. They should focus on the
words in italics to pick out the collocations.
They then complete the story with a partner.
Go through it together, asking different
Tip: It’s tempting to always partner students
with the person sitting next to them
when it comes to pairwork activities, as
it’s quick and easy. However, this can be
detrimental in the long run, as a weak–
strong pairing can result in the stronger
student doing all the work and the
weaker student just going along for the
ride. Students can also get used to their
partner’s way of doing and saying things.
So it’s worth taking the time to mix up
the pairs from time to time.
Art metaphors
6
2.24 Students look at the verbs in the
box and elicit the difference between them
(draw = reproduce an image using a pencil
or pen; paint = reproduce an image using
paints; picture = imagine; sketch = do a rough
drawing). They complete the conversation,
then listen to the recording to check.
Answers
1 draw 2 paint 3 picture 4 sketch
5 Picture 6 draws 7 painted 8 draw
9 sketch
Unit 4
93
7 Write the expressions in italics from 6 on the
board for students to match to the definitions.
Answers
1 isn’t as black as he is painted
2 draws level (with)
3 draw your attention to
4 sketch in a few more details
5 paint the town red
6 picture him, Picture the scene
7 draw up
8 sketch out
Extra idea: Write the phrases from
7 on separate strips of paper. Have
a conversation about art (painting,
photography, ballet, drama, etc). Say
what you like and what you don’t like.
Every 30 seconds, give someone a strip of
paper. They have to use the phrase in the
conversation immediately!
94
Unit 4
Units 3&4 Review
Aims
To review the vocabulary and grammar covered in
Units 3 and 4. Students also read about unusual
musical instruments in Aspects of culture.
Warm-up
Ask students if they’ve ever had their luggage go
missing or be damaged on a flight. If so, how did
they feel? Was the airline helpful?
Reading and speaking
1 To introduce the story, students look at the
photo and title of the article and guess what
happened.
Alternatively, write the words airline, luggage,
guitar and YouTube on the board and ask
students for predictions about the story.
They then read the article and check if their
predictions were correct. They can also look at
the glossary for difficult words.
Answers
United Airlines broke a musician’s guitar
while they were unloading it from the plane.
2 Students complete the sentences.
MA Stronger students should try to remember
the words, but let weaker ones look back at
the article.
Answers
1 check in 2 on the tarmac
3 baggage handlers 4 passengers
3 Students form groups of three or four to guess
what happened next. Get feedback, but don’t
confirm or refute their guesses at this stage.
Answer
Dave wrote a song about how the airline
broke his guitar. It went viral on YouTube
and United Airlines finally said sorry and
changed their baggage-handling policy.
pp41–42
4 Students read the rest of the article and check
if their predictions were correct.
Extra idea: Find the song online
(https://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=5YGc4zOqozo) and make a gapfill exercise of the lyrics.
Background notes
United Breaks Guitars is a protest song
by Canadian musician Dave Carroll and
his band, Sons of Maxwell. It chronicles a
real-life experience of how his guitar was
broken during a trip on United Airlines in
2008, and the subsequent reaction from
the airline. The song became an immediate
YouTube and iTunes hit in July 2009 and
was a public-relations disaster for the
airline.
His guitar was broken after baggage
handlers threw the band’s equipment from
the plane at Chicago O’Hare International
Airport. Carroll made a complaint to
United Airlines, but they told him he was
ineligible for compensation because he had
not made the claim within the 24-hour
timeframe.
Carroll posted his video on YouTube on
6 July, 2009. It had 150,000 views within
one day, and by 9 July, it had had over
half a million hits. By mid-August, it had
5 million hits and 10 million by February
2011. To date, the video has been seen
14 million times. Although United Airlines
eventually apologised and offered Carroll
$3,000 in compensation, the damage
was already done. Within four days of the
video being posted online, United Airlines’
stock price fell 10%, costing the company
about $180 million. In May 2012, Carroll
published a book, United Breaks Guitars:
The Power of One Voice in the Age of
Social Media, and now travels the world as
a speaker on Customer Service. Ironically,
on one of his trips abroad, United Airlines
lost his luggage!
Units 3&4 Review
95
Grammar
songs (no article: plural, first time mentioned)
talks (no article: plural, first time
mentioned)
a / the video (indefinite and definite articles:
singular countable noun mentioned more
than one time)
5 Do the first one together with the class as
an example; students then complete the
remaining gaps individually. Put students in
pairs to compare their answers. Encourage
them to give reasons for their choice of verb
tense (eg It’s past simple because ...).
You could also draw students’ attention to the
separable phrasal verb check in. Ask them to
say where else in the sentence the particle in
could go (They checked in their instruments.).
Ask if the word order is still flexible if their
instruments is replaced by a pronoun (No – the
only possible word order is ‘They checked them
in’.).
Extra idea: Copy the Background notes
on page 95 for extra reading practice. Ask
students to read the text and write down
what the following numbers and dates
refer to:
2008
(The year United Airlines
broke Dave’s guitar)
2009
(The year his song became a
YouTube hit)
24
(The number of hours he
had to make a claim for the
damage)
150,000
(The number of hits the
video received within the
first day)
14,000,000 (The number of times video
has been seen so far)
3,000
(The amount in dollars
offered in compensation by
United Airlines)
10
(The percentage that
United’s stock price fell by)
180,000,000 (The amount in dollars that
United lost off its share price)
1
(Appears in Dave’s book title:
United Breaks Guitars: The
Power of One Voice in the
Age of Social Media)
2012
(The year his book was
published)
Answers
1 flew 2 checked 3 were sitting
4 were throwing 5 had smashed
6 had seen
6 Draw attention to the two example sentences.
Ask students what must have and can’t have
are ((present perfect) modal verbs). Check
they understand the function of the sentences
(to make guesses and deductions about past
events).
Students write sentences about the questions
using can’t / might / must have. Ask them to
report back and correct if needed.
7 Students find the nouns in the article and
explain why the articles are used or not.
Answers
a book (indefinite article: singular, first time
mentioned)
a claim (indefinite article: singular, first time
mentioned)
guitars (no article: an unspecified plural
amount)
money (no article: uncountable noun, first
time mentioned)
music (no article: uncountable noun, first
time mentioned)
the phone (definite article: countable,
singular noun)
phone calls (no article: an unspecified plural
amount)
a / the song (indefinite and definite articles:
singular noun mentioned more than once)
96
Units 3&4 Review
Speaking
EXPLORE ONLINE
This can be done as homework or in class. All
three songs are by Sons of Maxwell and can be
found by searching for United Breaks Guitars
Song 1/2/3 on YouTube. Students watch the music
videos on their smartphones or tablets and discuss
which song and video they like best.
8
Close books. Students summarise the story
in their own words. They then read the article
and check if they remembered the details
correctly.
Extra idea: Write these four quotations
about customer service on the board:
‘The customer is always right.’ (Marshall
Field, Founder of Macy’s)
‘In the world of internet customer service,
it’s important to remember your competitor
is only one mouse click away.’ (Doug
Warner, American banker, JP Morgan)
‘Your most unhappy customers are your
greatest source of learning.’ (Bill Gates,
founder of Microsoft)
‘A customer is the most important visitor.
He is not dependent on us; we are
dependent on him.’ (Mahatma Gandhi,
ex-president of India)
Ask students which quotation they like best.
Aspects of culture
a Students read the information and use the
descriptions to match the paragraphs to the
photos. Set a short time limit so students
read for gist. They should underline words
they don’t know and guess meaning from
contextual clues.
Answers
1 mizwad 2 didgeridoo 3 (pan) pipes /
zampoña (no photo) 4 dhol 5 oud
b Give students time to think and write notes
down about each of the questions. Monitor
and help with language as needed.
Extra idea: Ask students if they’ve ever
heard – or even played – one of these
instruments. Have them find examples
online and do a survey to find out which
instrument the class likes best.
c
Students share information in small groups.
Walk around, monitor and write down good
sentences and any small mistakes you hear.
Highlight these when students report back in
feedback. If there are groups of students from
different countries in your class, they could
each give a short presentation on traditional
music from their country to the rest of the
class.
Units 3&4 Review
97
5
Chill out!
UNIT
FOCUS
GRAMMAR: first conditional; if / unless
VOCABULARY: -ed / -ing adjectives; words connected
FUNCTIONS: giving advice and making suggestions
Introduction p43
less) on the board, then split the class into
two teams. Dictate a mixture of countable
and uncountable nouns (eg flights, time,
money, seats, ideas, water, food, places,
beaches, people, etc) and ask members
of each team to come and write them in
the correct column (alternate between the
teams). They get one point for spelling the
word correctly and one point for writing
it in the correct column. You can decide
whether to allow the other members of the
team to help the student at the board or
not.
If the students are good at the activity,
include a few more difficult nouns that they
typically confuse at intermediate level, such
as advice, homework, information, fruit,
entertainment.
Aim
The focus of this lesson is to introduce the topic
of stress and ways of coping with it, mainly via a
quiz.
You first!
Students look at the photos and describe how
the people are feeling. Ask students why the man
is sleeping on the office floor. They then work in
pairs and discuss what things make them stressed
and why. You could also do a quick survey of the
top five things that stress students out.
1 Students discuss the questions with
personalised examples. They can do this in
small groups or as a class mingle. Encourage
them to ask extra questions to get more
information.
2 Quickly check students know the words
strategies (= plans to deal with different
situations successfully) and tend to (= be likely
to behave in a certain way). They ask each
other the questions in pairs, then report back
in feedback. Do a quick grammar review and
ask questions:
What tense is used in the questions?
(present simple)
• Which questions / answers contain adverbs
of frequency? (2, 4, 6, 9 and 12)
Students check their answers in the key, do the
exercises on page 72 linked to the language
in the quiz and discuss the questions in small
groups.
•
Answers
2 1 least 2 say 3 go 4 go
1c 2e 3d 4b 5a
98
Unit 5
Tip: Good speaking opportunities are often
missed, so always try to ask students to
do questionnaires, quizzes and surveys
in pairs rather than silently filling in
their own information or opinions. This
encourages extra speaking and learner
interaction. It also reinforces question
forms and creates a natural information
gap where students can find out more
about each other.
3
FINISH IT Check students understand all
the words and expressions – ask them to
mime them to you or to each other! Write the
sentence starter on the board – students come
up with a different example from the one in
the book, then complete the sentence in three
different ways with personal information.
Remind them that they don’t have to use the
words / phrases in the box if they don’t want
to.
4
EVERYBODY UP! Students walk around and
ask each other about the things that stress
them out. Remind them that they don’t have
to find the same person for all three sentences.
5 have
Extra idea: Elicit or explain the difference
between fewer with countable nouns and
less with uncountable ones (fewer glasses /
less money). Write two columns (fewer and
with the body; words connected with work
Lesson 1 How did you react?
Aims
Answer
In order from best to least, this animal likes:
honey, fruit, fish, small animals, insects.
It’s a bear.
The focus of this lesson is an analysis of students’
reactions to stressful situations and using the first
conditional to describe probable or likely events
in the future. It also highlights the difference
between -ed and -ing adjectives, and students
learn words connected with the body in the
Vocabulary section.
Extra idea: Students produce a similar
test about another animal and food or
drink. They quickly look up information on
their smartphones, then do the test with a
partner.
pp44–45
Warm-up
Put students in groups of four. One of the group
is the ‘victim’. They move their chairs so that one
student puts a chair to victim’s right and another
puts a chair to their left. The third student sits in
front of the victim. The student on the right asks
the victim questions about opinions (eg Do you
like sushi? Why not? What’s your favourite holiday
destination? Why?). The student on the left asks
logical questions (eg What’s 7 + 9? How do you
spell ‘difficult’?). The student in front makes
gestures and movements.
Students ask their questions at the same time and
quickly to make it as stressful as possible for the
victim! The victim has to answer the questions and
copy the gestures of the person in front of them.
After one minute, they stop and move clockwise
into the next seat until everyone has been the
victim.
Get feedback. How did they feel under so much
pressure with so many questions coming at them
and so many gestures to do at the same time?
Which questions were easier to answer? Why?
1
THINK Explain to students that this test is
designed to put them under a lot of pressure
for a few moments so they become more
aware of what happens physically when they’re
under stress. The very short time of 20 seconds
is impossible for most people! Of course, it’s
an artificial situation, but they’ll still experience
some stress signs. And you can increase their
stress – and distract their thinking – by saying
things like Come on!, Hurry up!, Be quick!,
Only five seconds left!.
After 20 seconds, stop the activity and ask
everyone to stand up and do a quick gorilla
thump (or something else physical) to get rid of
any tension in their body.
2 Students tick the boxes that were true for
them and give their reactions to the test.
Look at any new expressions and elicit the
meanings of give up, go blank and freeze in
context.
3 Elicit which reactions were positive and
negative. Check answers in feedback.
Answers
All of the sentences are negative (N) except
I got excited and It was challenging.
Vocabulary 1 -ed / -ing adjectives
4
Students complete the table and check with
a partner. Elicit which adjective is different. Ask
students which words are very similar in their
own language and which are very different.
Answers
challenge
challenged
challenging
confuse
confused
confusing
excite
excited
exciting
frustrate
frustrated
frustrating
interest
interested
interesting
relax
relaxed
relaxing
stress
stressed
stressful
We don’t use an -ing suffix for stress.
We say stressful.
Extra idea: Ask students which adjectives
from the table can be preceded by get.
Answer: confused, confusing, excited,
exciting, frustrated, frustrating, interested,
interesting, stressed, stressful
Unit 5
99
5
John did a 10km run, so it’s not surprised /
surprising that he’s tired.
The lesson was really confused / confusing.
No one understood a thing.
I’m sorry I’m late, but there’s no need to be
so annoyed / annoying with me.
Jane teaches young children. It’s an
exhausted / exhausting job.
You could also use nine of the sentences
above (or make new ones of your own)
to play a game. Draw a noughts-andcrosses grid on the board and write one
of the sentences in each space with a
gap where the adjective goes. Invite two
students to come to the board. The first
student chooses a space and completes the
sentence with an appropriate -ed or -ing
adjective (more than one adjective may be
possible). If they’re right, they put a cross
in their space. If they’re wrong, the second
student can correct it and put a circle in the
space. The first one to get a straight line
across the board (horizontally, vertically or
diagonally) wins.
This can either be done at the board or
by giving the students a worksheet with
extra games and examples. It’s fun and
different and it reviews verb patterns in a
learner- centred way. To extend the activity,
ask students to make their own boards and
examples. This gets them more involved and
minimises your preparation.
Play the recording for students to check
their answers.
2.2
Answers
See answers for 4.
6 Elicit example sentences from students to
provide more context (eg The James Bond film
was very exciting. I felt really excited when I
heard you were coming.). Compare them and
elicit the grammar rules from students.
Check understanding by asking students how
the words ‘The Stress Test’ made them feel
when they saw them at the top of the page!
Answers
a) -ed adjectives describe how someone
feels.
b) -ing adjectives describe the people or
things that cause those feelings.
7 Students complete the text with the adjectives
in 4. Check answers together, then allow
students to stretch, jump or run for a minute!
Answers
1 stressful
4 stressed
2 excited 3 interested
5 frustrated 6 relaxed
Extra ideas: Write these sentences on
the board and ask students to choose the
correct adjective:
I was disappointed / disappointing with the
movie; I expected it to be better.
Are you interested / interesting in football?
The game was quite excited / exciting.
It’s embarrassed / embarrassing when you
have to ask people for money.
I was really amazed / amazing when I got
the job.
She has made astonished / astonishing
progress in her English.
I didn’t find the situation very funny.
I wasn’t amused / amusing.
I really liked the book, it was really
interested / interesting.
Bungee jumping was a terrified / terrifying
experience.
I was shocked /shocking when I heard the
news.
The lesson was so bored / boring.
100
Unit 5
MA Write the -ed / -ing adjectives in a word
bank on the board. This enables weaker
students to look at the board and choose
adjectives to complete the sentences.
8
YOUR STORY Students work in pairs to
ask and answer each other’s questions. Walk
around and note down any good sentences
or small mistakes you hear. Get feedback,
highlight good use of English and correct as
needed. Ask a few students to retell their
partner’s story to the rest of the class.
Tip: Play gentle background music to create a
relaxed atmosphere (instrumental music
usually works best). It breaks the silence
and students will generally talk more if
they think no one is listening to them. It
encourages them to speak more loudly
and clearly, too.
Vocabulary 2 Words connected with the
body
9 Students complete the text and check their
answers. Explain the expression get butterflies
in your stomach and elicit examples of when
students have had that feeling. Ask if they
have similar idioms in their language(s).
Answers
1 neck 2 shoulders 3 heart 4 mouth
5 throat 6 stomach 7 eyes 8 ears
9 mind
Mind is different, because it isn’t a physical
part of the body.
10 Students explain how they felt. Ask them extra
questions: Do you always feel that way when
you take tests? Why? What things do you do
to calm down?
Listening
11 Students put the words into the two
categories. Explain that it isn’t the words
themselves that are stressful or not, it’s the
things they’re associated with. Then students
compare with a partner to see if they agree.
Be flexible when checking answers, as some
people find phones stressful but others like
to talk to their friends and find it relaxing, for
example. However, few students are likely to
consider a heart attack as ‘not stressful’!
Suggested answers
stressful: city, work, heart attack,
insomnia, phone, pressure, tired, traffic jam
not stressful: country, exercise, fresh air,
gardening, sleep, therapist, walk
12
PREDICT Students make predictions
about the cartoon in pairs. Encourage them to
use modal verbs (eg He could be ... , He might
be ... , He must be ...). Play the recording so
they can listen and check their answers.
2.3
Answer
The man is seeing a therapist because he
finds work and commuting stressful and
is constantly answering his phone. The
therapist is advising him to do something
relaxing, such as move to the country, do
some gardening and go for walks, so that
he doesn’t have a heart attack.
Transcript
therapist What seems to be the problem,
Mr Beaver?
steve
I’m so tired. I work and work and
work all day, and I can’t sleep at
night. Every day, I’m in my office
from eight in the morning until eight
at night and the phones never stop
ringing. And I always get stuck in a
traffic jam on my way home. It takes
two hours, and my phone never
stops ringing. What can I do? I’m so
stressed! Soooo stressed!
therapist Well, Mr Beaver, I’m afraid that …
steve
Oh no! Excuse me. Hello? Yes? Yes?
Yes, do it now. If you do it now,
it’ll arrive tomorrow! If you do it
now, it won’t arrive late. OK? Right.
Goodbye. I’m sorry about that.
Please, go on.
therapist Well, Mr Beaver, I’m afraid that …
steve
Oh no! Excuse me. Hello? Yes? Yes?
Yes, do it now. If you don’t do it
now, it won’t arrive tomorrow! If you
don’t do it now, it’ll arrive late. OK?
Right. Goodbye. I’m sorry about that.
Please, go on.
therapist Please switch off your phone, Mr
Beaver. If you keep answering your
phone, we won’t make any progress.
steve
Yes, of course. I’m so sorry.
therapist Well, Mr Beaver, I’m afraid that if you
go on like this, you’ll have serious
health problems. In fact, you’ll
probably have a heart attack!
steve
If I go on like this, I’ll have a heart
attack? Really?
therapist Yes, really. How old are you?
steve
I’m 45.
therapist Well, if you don’t slow down, you
won’t get to 60! In fact, if you don’t
slow down, you probably won’t get
to 50!
steve
Oh my goodness! And if I learn to
relax a bit?
Unit 5
101
therapist
steve
therapist
If you learn to relax a bit? You’ll feel
much better if you learn to relax a bit!
Really?
Really. Why don’t you buy a little
place in the country, do some
gardening, go for walks and breathe
in the pure country air? Then I’m
sure ...
Tip: Before students listen to a recording,
ask questions about the content and
elicit predictions. You don’t have to
acknowledge correct answers; try to get
peer verification instead and throw the
answers back to the class (eg What do
you think? Do you agree? Why?).
Extra idea: Ask extra questions and draw
a timeline and scale on the board to check
students’ understanding of the function
and form of the first conditional.
1
2
If you relax a bit, you’ll feel much better.
relax feel better
past ___________________________
future
X
X
now
possible, quite likely _____________
unlikely
X
•
•
•
13 Students answer the questions in pairs. Play
the recording again so they can check their
answers.
MA Weaker students may need to listen to
the recording again before answering the
questions.
Answers
1 He works in the office all day.
2 The phones never stop ringing.
3 He always gets stuck in a traffic jam.
4 He can’t sleep.
5 He is interrupted by phone calls.
6 The therapist tells him to move to the
country, do some gardening, go for walks
and breathe in the pure country air.
Grammar First conditional
14 Students complete the sentences. Encourage
them to look at the transcript to check their
answers. They then discuss the questions in
pairs.
Answers
1 If you go on like this, you will
(probably) have a heart attack!
2 If you don’t slow down, you won’t
get to sixty!
3 You’ll feel much better if you learn to
relax a bit.
1 present tense
2 will + base form
3 yes
102
Unit 5
•
•
•
How many parts does the sentence
have? (two)
When is the sentence about? (the
future)
What does he have to do to feel better?
(relax a bit)
Will he relax? (maybe)
What word tells us it is not definite? (if)
Is it possible or likely in future? (yes)
You could also demonstrate inversion and
use of the comma:
You’ll feel much better if you relax a bit.
•
•
•
•
Can we change the sentence like that?
(yes)
Is there anything different? (no comma)
So when do we put a comma? (when
the if clause is first)
When do we use the first conditional?
(when things are possible or quite likely
in future)
15 Students look at the pictures and the example,
then make predictions about the other pictures
using the first conditional. Check answers
in feedback and correct any grammatical
mistakes you hear. You could ask students to
switch the order of the clauses in each answer
for practice.
MA You may need to help weaker students
with the vocabulary to express their ideas for
some of the pictures.
Suggested answers
1 If he cycles to work, he’ll get there
more quickly and lose some weight.
2 If he smokes less, he’ll feel better. / If he
stops smoking, he’ll reduce his risk of a
heart attack.
3 If he does more exercise / goes to the
gym, he’ll get fitter / feel better.
4 If he switches off his phone sometimes /
uses his phone less, he’ll be more
relaxed.
5 If he goes walking / takes more
exercise, he’ll feel better / lose weight.
6 If he eats fewer hamburgers / more
healthily, he’ll lose weight and feel
more energetic.
Extra idea: This activity can be used to
change pairs, encourage speaking and also
review the grammar. Write first conditional
sentences on slips of paper and cut them
into two parts. Mix them up and turn
them over. Then ask students to pick up
the sentence halves. They walk around
the room and say their clause to another
student. If it doesn’t match, they have
to do the same again until they make a
correct sentence. Then they sit down with
their new partner. Make sure that they
don’t shout out the clause on their slip,
show anyone or group together. This limits
the amount of speaking they do.
Writing and speaking
16 PREDICT Students work in pairs to make
predictions and complete Steve’s story. They
read out their endings and vote on the best one.
They then compare with the original on page
73. Is the ending the same / similar? If it’s not,
which ending do they prefer?
17 ROLE-PLAY Give students time to write
the role-play with a partner and offer useful
language to help them. Elicit the kinds of
question the therapist might ask for each of
the three phases:
1 What’s the problem? (Draw students’
attention to the more indirect / polite form
in the example and the recording: What
seems to be the problem?)
2 Can you tell me a bit more about that?
When / Where does it happen? How long
have you had this problem? How is it a
problem?
3 If you do X, I think it will help.
Possible language for the client’s problem:
Every time I see / hear X, I do Y.
If I X, Y happens.
Students then do the role-play together using
the prompts. Walk around, monitor and correct
as needed.
MA Let weaker students look back at the
transcript to help them.
Extra idea: Think of 15 words you want
to review from earlier in the unit. Write
them on the board. Tell students to choose
any five of them and write them down.
Read the 15 words out in any order. When
students hear one of the words they’ve
written down, they cross it out. The first
person to cross out all of their words shouts
‘Bingo!’.
Lesson 2 Face to face with a
bear! pp46–47
Aims
The focus of this lesson is unless + the first
conditional. Students also read about the human
stress response mechanism and our fight-or-flight
reaction in dangerous situations. In the Speaking
section at the end of the lesson, students come up
with a list of physical activities that relieve stress.
You first!
Students look at the photo and work in pairs to
think about the best way to escape, then share
their ideas and choose the best options. Note that
although students are actually using the second
conditional here to speculate, the focus is on the
ideas, not the grammar, so don’t labour the point.
Just present I’d + verb as the structure they should
use.
MA You could give weaker students these options
to choose from: run, shout, climb a tree, walk
away slowly, fight it, play dead, go upwind from it,
go downwind from it, punch it on the nose, talk
to it gently.
Answers
run: Bears can run fast and can easily catch
you. Bad choice!
shout: This will frighten the bear and make
it even more aggressive. Bad choice!
Unit 5
103
climb a tree: You probably haven’t
climbed a tree since you were ten years
old. Anyway, bears can climb trees too. Bad
choice!
walk away slowly and don’t make any
sudden movements: Bears are less likely
to attack if they don’t feel threatened.
Lowering your gaze and wandering
nonchalantly away may make the bear
realise you are not a threat and leave you
alone. Good choice!
fight it: The bear always wins. Bad choice!
play dead and don’t move: Bears have
bad eyesight, so if you don’t move, they are
less likely to see you. Good choice!
go downwind from the bear: Bears
don’t have good eyesight and rely on their
sense of smell. If you’re downwind, they
won’t be able to smell you. Good choice!
go upwind from the bear: No! The bear
will be able to smell you and find you. Bad
choice!
punch it on the nose: You shouldn’t hit
the bear. Fighting back will only result in
more serious injuries.
talk to it gently: Bears probably don’t
understand English, so it won’t help. Bad
choice!
Reading
1
2
4 Students read the article and check if their
predictions in 2 and 3 were correct. Set a time
limit so they read quickly for gist and don’t
worry too much about unknown vocabulary.
Encourage them to correct any false answers.
Answers
1 False (We have always had the stress
response mechanism.)
2 False (The response is quick and
automatic.)
3 True
4 False (More blood flows to our brain
and muscles.)
5 False (It’s better for physical situations.)
6 False (It can cause major illnesses too.)
Extra idea: Write the phrase fight or flight
on the board and ask students to explain
what it means (= the two natural responses
to a threatening situation: stay and fight
or run away). Explain that flight here is
not linked to planes or birds, it’s the noun
related to the verb flee (= run away).
Students circle or underline the words
connected to the body. Check answers in
feedback. Ask students which words are very
similar in their own language and which are
very different.
EXPLORE ONLINE
This can be done as homework or in class.
Students look up information about the link
between stress and illness using their smartphones
or tablets and report back to the class.
Answers
blood vessel, brain, heart, hormone, illness,
immune system, infection, muscle, skin,
stomach
5 Students read the article again and work in
pairs to find the words and phrases. Check
answers in feedback and help with any other
unknown vocabulary.
PREDICT Students read the definition and
guess the words from 1 that are connected to
it. Check their ideas quickly (the answers given
below are those that students are most likely
to guess, not those that are actually featured in
the article).
Suggested answers
blood vessel, brain, danger, heart,
hormone, muscles, skin, survival
104
3 Students read through the statements with
a partner and decide whether they’re true or
false. Don’t check their answers at this stage or
ask them to correct the false ones; this will be
done in 4.
Unit 5
Answers
1 enabled 2 kicked in 3 automatically
4 affect 5 heal 6 use up 7 get rid of
8 damage
Answers
Stress hormones will stay in our body
unless we do something physical.
1 b
2 a present tense
b will + verb (base form)
3 negative
Tip: Although some teachers don’t
encourage the use of dictionaries, they
are useful, especially in mixed-ability
classes. It’s obviously great if students
can figure out meaning from context and
read quickly, but not everyone can do
it! Weaker students are often shy about
asking questions, and just having the
ability to check words occasionally makes
them feel more relaxed. Taking their
dictionaries away could cause them to
feel more nervous and stressed, which is
the last thing you want.
Extra idea: To help weaker students in
mixed-ability classes, write first conditional
sentences with if and unless on the board
so they can compare them in a clear, more
visual way. Cross out don’t in clauses
beginning with unless:
If we don’t take action, stress hormones
will stay in our body.
Unless we don’t take action, stress
hormones will stay in our body.
6 Students guess the meaning of the orange
words and phrases in context. They should
look at the co-text (the rest of the sentence
around the highlighted words) to help them.
7
Answers
hunter-gatherer: person that lives by
hunting and gathering fruit, etc, rather
than farming
swelling: when part of the body becomes
bigger when injured or ill
factor: a fact or reason why something
happens
minor: small, having little importance
major: more important or serious
Ask questions to check students
understand function and form:
• Is it possible that stress hormones will
remain in our body? (yes)
• Why do we say sentences like this?
(to warn people or give advice)
• Which words are different? (if and unless)
• When do we use the negative ‘don’t?’
(in if clauses)
• Do we use the negative ‘don’t’ in clauses
with ‘unless?’ (no)
Students work in pairs to complete the
diagram and write notes about the stress
response mechanism in preparation for their
talk / paragraph.
You could also review clause inversion:
Stress hormones will stay in our body if we
don’t take action.
Stress hormones will stay in our body
unless we don’t take action.
• Can we change the order of the
clauses? (yes)
• When the result clause comes first in
the sentence, is there a comma? (no)
MA Weaker students can look back at the
article to help them at any stage in the process.
Answers
1 brain 2 system 3 cortisol 4 heart
5 blood vessels 6 organs 7 beats faster
8 goes up 9 skin and stomach
10 brain and muscles 11 breathe
12 (physical) energy
GRAMMAR unless + first conditional
8 Students complete the sentences and discuss
the grammar rules in pairs. Check answers in
feedback.
9
SEARCH AND THINK Students will need
to look at the transcript for this exercise.
Alternatively, play the recording again, pausing
after each if statement, so students can listen
and adapt the sentences. Look at the example
together and point out how the verb (keep)
has been changed to stop to preserve the
meaning. Check answers in feedback and
correct any mistakes you hear.
MA Stronger students could also rewrite
Steve’s if sentences (shown in brackets in the
Answers).
Unit 5
105
Answers
(Unless you do it now, it won’t arrive
tomorrow!)
(Unless you do it now, it’ll arrive late.)
Unless you stop answering your phone, we
won’t make any progress.
I’m afraid that unless you stop, you’ll have
serious health problems.
(Unless I stop, I’ll have a heart attack?)
Unless you slow down, you won’t get to 60!
Unless you slow down, you probably won’t
get to 50!
You won’t feel much better unless you learn
to relax a bit!
Extra idea: Make a card game with if /
unless clauses written on them. Mix them
up and turn them over so students have
no idea what they are choosing. Put them
in pairs or groups of three. They take turns
picking up a card, reading it and reacting
immediately by thinking of a consequence.
The jobs pictured are:
1 firefighter 2 doctor 3 teacher
4 miner 5 businessman / businesswoman /
manager 6 journalist 7 librarian
8 nursery teacher / nurse 9 hairdresser
10 pilot 11 police officer 12 vet
Extra idea: Do an online image search
and find about 20 photos of different jobs.
Tell students you’re going to show them
images and give them about five seconds
to look at each photo. Put students in pairs
and give them one minute to write as many
down as they can remember. The pair that
gets the most wins the game.
Vocabulary Words connected with work (1)
1
Check that students know the word rating.
They discuss the questions and rate the jobs
from least to most stressful. Ask students
which words are very similar in their own
language and which are very different.
Speaking
Listening 1
10 Students make lists and then compare with
other groups. Alternatively, they could walk
around the room and tell each other the things
they do to help them deal with stress. Try a few
of the suggestions in the classroom if possible!
2
Lesson 3 Nine to five pp48–49
Aims
The focus of this lesson is words connected with
work; students discuss the most enjoyable and
stressful jobs in the Writing and speaking section.
They also find out about the advantages and
disadvantages of being a pilot and listen to the
song Nine to Five by Dolly Parton.
You first!
Students look at the photos and discuss the
questions. Ensure they know the vocabulary
to describe the jobs shown, and their own job
if necessary. If they haven’t got much work
experience to date, change the activity and ask
them which jobs they would most like to do in the
future, giving reasons for their ideas.
106
Unit 5
2.4 Students listen to the conversation and
check if their predictions from 1 were correct.
Play and pause the recording as necessary.
Answers
Miner 8.3, librarian 2.0, police officer 7.7,
airline pilot 7.5, journalist 7.5, doctor 6.8,
firefighter 6.3, teacher 6.2, senior manager
5.8, nursery nurse 3.3, hairdresser 4.3, vet
4.5, soldier 4.7
Transcript
woman Hi there.
man
Hi. What are you doing?
woman I’ve got this project to do for Monday
about stressful occupations. I’m just
looking at some research they did at
UMIST in 1987.
man
Interesting?
woman Yes, very. What would you guess the
most stressful job was in 1987?
man
Um, dentist? Heart surgeon?
woman Nah! Miner. They gave it a rating
of 8.3.
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
man
woman
Miner? Really? Mind you, I can
imagine being a miner must be a really
difficult job. Did they rate the least
stressful job, too?
Yes, being a librarian. Stress rating 2!
That’s low. Let’s have a look – police
officer’s high, isn’t it? 7.7. And airline
pilot and journalist both have a rating
of 7.5!
Yes. Then doctor 6.8, firefighter 6.3,
teacher 6.2 and senior manager 5.8.
Really? I would expect being a
firefighter to be a lot more stressful
than being a journalist. What about the
least stressful jobs? What’s down here?
Um, being a nursery nurse is OK – 3.3.
And hairdresser at 4.3 is just a bit less
stressful than vet – 4.5.
Oh, that’s a surprise – soldier 4.7!
I would expect it to be a lot higher
than that.
Yes, but remember this was 1987.
Things are a bit different nowadays.
True. Well, I’m just going out for a run.
I’ll see you in a while.
Fine. See you. Have a good run!
Extra ideas: Write the following jobs
on the board for students to guess what
ratings they were given in the same survey:
builder (7.5), dentist (7.3), actor (7.0),
ambulance driver (6.3), musician (6.3),
social worker (6.0), salesman (5.7), hotelier
(5.3), accountant (4.8), farmer (4.8), travel
agent (4.8), secretary (4.7), civil servant
(4.4), estate agent (4.3), solicitor (4.3),
architect (4.0), scientist (3.4).
Students complete the sentences in the
Grammar spot with the correct information.
Tip: Tell students that it’s important to keep
listening even if they think they know the
answer. They’ll often hear something,
assume it’s the answer and then switch
off. This is a mistake, because the
thing that they hear first, especially in
exams, is usually there to distract them.
The information in the recording is
deliberately not given consistently from
most to least stressful, so they have to
listen to the end of the conversation in
order to get the correct answers.
3 Students discuss the questions in pairs. Get
feedback and check their ideas and opinions.
Answer
2 Dentist, heart surgeon and soldier are
mentioned in the recording, but not
pictured.
Listening 2
4
2.5 GUESS Give students time to read the
questions and ask them to predict any changes
to the ratings. Play and pause the recording as
necessary.
Transcript
man
You still there? What are you doing
now?
woman Now I’m looking at a more recent
survey – 2014, in fact.
man
Oh. And are the ratings still the same?
woman Well, this one doesn’t actually have
ratings, but a lot of the most stressful
jobs in 1987 are still high on the
list: firefighters, airline pilots, senior
managers, journalists, police officers –
all of those jobs are still up at the top.
man
What about the least stressful jobs?
woman Lots of those have stayed the same,
too.
man
So being a librarian or a hairdresser is
still a good choice if you want to avoid
stress?
woman Absolutely. But there have been some
major changes, too. Miners – which
were top of the list in 1987 – were
completely absent from the list of the
ten most stressful jobs in 2014.
man
So what was top of the list this time?
woman Military personnel! Soldiers!
5 Students talk about the questions and offer
their ideas. This activity also provides a nice,
quick review of comparative and superlative
adjectives.
Answers
1 Most of the most stressful jobs
(firefighters, airline pilots, senior
managers, journalists, police officers)
are the same, as are most of the least
stressful jobs (librarian and hairdresser).
Unit 5
107
But miners have disappeared from the
list completely, and soldiers are now at
the top.
2 Mines have been closing in many
countries in recent years and so there
are many fewer miners than there
used to be. On the other hand, wars
– involving international forces – have
been increasing around the world,
making a soldier’s job more stressful.
Song link
This could be done at home or in the classroom
using smartphones and tablets. Students find the
song online and answer the questions.
Answers
1 The song was written and sung by Dolly
Parton for the 1980 film of the same
name.
2 They are her bosses.
3 A typewriter
Extra idea: Create a gap-fill exercise with
the song lyrics. Play it (on audio or video)
in class for students to listen and fill in the
gaps. Play it again for them to compare
answers with a partner.
Culture note
Dolly Parton (born 19 January, 1946) is an
American singer-songwriter best known
for her country music. She wrote the song
Nine to Five for the 1980 film of the same
name, starring Jane Fonda, Lily Tomlin and
Parton herself, and it became something
of an anthem for office workers. It gained
an Academy Award nomination and four
Grammy nominations, and reached the
number-one spot in the American charts. It
is one of the few songs to feature the noise
of a typewriter; Parton relates that she used
her false nails to work out the rhythm of
the typewriter when writing the song.
108
Unit 5
Extra idea: Students find other songs
about working. Do they generally give a
negative or a positive view of working life?
MA Point weaker students in the direction
of Lee Dorsey’s 1966 hit Working in a
Coalmine.
Listening 3
6 Write the word shift on the board and elicit
what it means (a period of time during the day
or night when people work). Give an example
(eg doctor, nurse) and ask students to think of
jobs that typically involve shift work.
7
2.6 GUESS Students listen carefully for
key words and clues. Play and pause the
recording for students to guess the job.
Answers
She is an air traffic controller. Likely key
words: JFK, guiding planes ... onto and off
the runways, eight-hour shifts.
Transcript
Well, it’s a wonderful job and the people I
work with are great, but it’s an enormous
responsibility. Being responsible for the safety
of so many people can be extremely stressful.
But the pay is good because of that – it’s a very
well-paid job.
It’s absolutely exhausting, though. We work
eight-hour shifts here in the States, which can
be morning or evening or night shifts – night
shifts are the hardest. You often feel exhausted
the next day if you work overnight. And we
sometimes only get about eight hours rest
between shifts. Eight hours is just not long
enough – unless you live nearby, you don’t
get much rest. And most of us live a long
way away. By the time you get out of JFK, get
home, get something to eat and spend some
time with your family, there isn’t much time for
sleep! I often get less than four hours’ sleep
and it’s hard to concentrate when you’re so
tired. And in my work, you have to concentrate
every single minute. If you don’t concentrate,
you’re putting a lot of lives at risk. When
you’re guiding planes full of passengers and
crew onto and off the runways and around
an airport, you need to be very awake! Some
people have fallen asleep on the job on the
night shift. It’s very rare, but they’ll fire you if
they catch you asleep. Though it’s actually not
dangerous unless you’re working alone, and
most of the time we aren’t.
8 Play and pause the recording again for
students to write the answers. They then check
in pairs. Go through some of the vocabulary
afterwards (eg rare, fire) for students to guess
the meanings.
Answers
1 Because you are responsible for the
safety of lots of people.
2 They are eight-hour shifts.
3 The breaks between shifts are about
eight hours.
4 Go home, get something to eat and
spend some time with their family;
there isn’t much time for sleep.
5 You put a lot of lives at risk.
6 They’ll fire you.
9
Students write a list. Then play the
recording again so they can check how many
things they remembered correctly.
Answers
The enormous responsibility, the fact
that it’s exhausting, the different shifts
(especially the night shifts), the short time
to rest between shifts, travelling to and
from JFK, the lack of sleep, having to
concentrate every minute.
Vocabulary Words connected with work (2)
10 Students match the words. Tell them there may
sometimes be more than one possibility.
Answers
difficult: boss, colleagues, environment,
working hours
long: working hours
low: salary
negative: feedback, boss, colleagues
noisy: environment, colleagues
tight: deadlines
uncomfortable: uniform
unfriendly: boss, colleagues, environment
These are all factors that can cause stress in
a job.
11 Students work in pairs and think of possible
opposites. They can use their dictionaries or
smartphones to look up words if necessary.
Suggested answers
difficult: understanding, supportive,
congenial, friendly
long: short, reasonable
low: high, good, OK
negative: positive
noisy: quiet
tight: flexible, generous
uncomfortable: comfortable
unfriendly: nice, friendly
Extra idea: You could also add other
useful language such as:
a lack of: appreciation, support, challenges,
training, career prospects,
not enough / too much: competition,
travel, danger, noise, variety, overtime,
responsibility
12 YOUR STORY Students talk about the
questions in pairs. Encourage them to use the
vocabulary in 10 and 11. They report back,
then vote for the best ideas on making work /
studies more enjoyable and less stressful.
Take a break
Students do some research on ways that a working
or studying environment could be made less
stressful. Ask them if they’ve heard of feng shui,
the Chinese system of establishing harmony with
the environment, which includes lots of theories
about ways to make a space calmer.
Writing and speaking
13 VIDEO OPTION Students record a short
video using their smartphones. If they’re
in work, they can focus on that; if they’re
students, they can choose a hobby or pastime,
or choose a job they’d like to do. If they’re a
bit shy and reluctant to upload their videos,
that’s fine. Just encourage them share them in
small groups.
14 Students watch each other’s videos and decide
who has the most / least stressful job. Ask
extra questions (eg Which jobs did you find
interesting? Which jobs would you like to do?
Why?).
Unit 5
109
Everyday English p50
Giving advice and making suggestions
1
GUESS Students look at the photo and make
predictions. What can they see? (vocabulary
notes) What language is it? (Spanish) Write a
few sentence starters on the board (He might
be ... , He could be ...) to prompt ideas and to
practise modal verbs.
2
2.7 6 Students watch the video and check
if their predictions were correct.
Answers
Charlie is worried about his Spanish exam
at school.
Transcript
dana
Hey, Charlie.
charlie Oh, hi Dana.
dana
What’s the matter with you? You look
awful!
charlie Gee, thanks.
dana
No, really. You look as though you
haven’t slept in weeks!
charlie I know. I can’t sleep! I’m so stressed
out. I’ve got my Spanish oral exam
tomorrow.
dana
Oh, that’s right. I forgot about that.
But, don’t worry, you’ll be fine. Your
Spanish is terrific!
charlie You think so? You really think so?
dana
Absolutely.
charlie How do you know? You don’t speak
Spanish!
dana
Yeah, but your friend from Argentina
said your Spanish was really good.
charlie But I’m so terrified that I won’t be able
to open my mouth.
dana
Well, if you relax, it’ll help.
charlie Oh?
dana
OK, sit back and I’ll help you, all right?
You know I have practice with this. I
work in a health club every weekend!
charlie Right, good point.
dana
Are you comfortable?
charlie Uh-huh.
dana
Now. Just try breathing slowly and
deeply for a moment. Slowly and
deeply. That’s right. You got it.
I suggest you breathe in through your
nose and out through your mouth.
110
Unit 5
Can you do that? That’s right. Now,
just shut your eyes for a moment
and see if you can imagine the exam
tomorrow. Imagine you’re in the
room. You’re sitting at the table and
the examiner is on the other side.
The examiner is smiling. And you’re
talking and talking. And now you’re
both laughing. Your Spanish is perfect.
You’re talking like a native speaker!
Charlie? Charlie? Oh.
3 Students work in pairs and tick the advice.
Play the recording again so they can check
their answers together. Draw attention to verb
forms (I suggest you breathe in ... Try breathing
slowly and deeply ...). Do some repetition
drilling to practise pronunciation and help
students remember the phrases.
Answers
If you ..., it’ll help.
Try ...ing.
I suggest you ...
Just ...
See if you can ...
4 Students work in pairs to give suggestions and
advice using the phrases from 3. Walk around,
help and correct as needed.
2.8 Students often don’t hear the
5 P
contraction of will (it’s called a ‘dark l’ and is
difficult to notice), so it’s helpful to repeat the
full form and contraction. You could also point
out the weak form of you.
If you relax, it’ll help.
/ɪf jə rɪˈlæks ɪtl ˈhelp/
2.9 Play the recording for students to
6 P
repeat together. Some students might find the
sound difficult, so you may have to show them
the tongue position (it’s an alveolar sound, so
get them to gently touch the ridge just above
the top teeth).
7 Students work in pairs to think of contexts for
the sentences (eg I bought Emma a T-shirt for
her birthday – she’ll love it.). Invite a few pairs
to read their sentences to the class.
8 Do the first one with the class as an example.
Get feedback and ask students which
suggestions they like best. Which ones do they
already do? Which ones will they try? Note
that there are some ‘red herrings’ which may
mislead students (eg Do will also collocate
with yoga or tai chi, but students should work
out that this can’t be the correct match by a
process of elimination.).
Answers
1i 2d 3f
8a 9h
4e
5g
6c
7b
9 Students combine the suggestions with the
phrase. Remind them to say the short form of
will.
10 Students create a stress-busting plan using the
suggestions given and their own ideas. They
then walk around the room and share their
ideas with each other.
Extra idea: Students write ten recently
learnt words down and test each other.
One student gives a definition, their partner
guesses the word.
Jobs review
3 Give students a couple of minutes to complete
the jobs before they compare their answers
in pairs. Encourage them to add to the list
if they can (eg painter, sculptor, designer,
editor, plumber, engineer, doctor, teacher,
farm worker, factory worker, cleaner, dancer,
driver, explorer, firefighter, hairdresser, lawyer,
lecturer, reporter, singer, tennis / football
player, author, sailor, professor, lecturer).
Answers
1 actor 2 banker 3 conductor
4 director 5 instructor 6 manager
7 miner 8 soldier 9 writer
2.25 Students work in pairs and mark
4 P
the stressed syllables. Play the recording for
them to check and elicit which job has a
different stress pattern. Play the recording
again for them to practise.
Answers
1 actor 2 banker 3 conductor
4 director 5 instructor 6 manager
7 miner 8 soldier 9 writer
They all have the main stress on the syllable
before -or / -er except for manager.
Vocabulary plus p66
Parts of the body review
1 Ensure that students understand internal
organs (= parts of the body under the skin that
perform particular jobs). They then work in
pairs to circle the words that refer to internal
organs.
Answers
brain, heart, lung, stomach
Although the skin is the largest organ in
the human body, it’s not an internal organ.
2 Divide the class into two or three teams and
give them a time limit (eg five minutes) to think
of as many parts of the body as they can to
add to the list in 1. You can decide whether
to limit this to internal organs or to accept any
part of the body. Have team A call out a word
from their list. If none of the other teams has
it on their list, team A wins a point. Continue
with the other teams until all the items have
been read out. The team with the most points
wins.
5
Students work in pairs to make as many job
titles as they can. Feed back as a class to see
which pair got the most. Ask students which
words are very similar in their own language
and which are very different.
Answers
company: director, manager, receptionist
heart: surgeon
hotel: manager, receptionist, worker
lorry: driver
office: assistant, manager, receptionist,
worker
Pilates: instructor
prison: officer
sales: assistant, director, manager
Extra idea: Ask students which of these
jobs they would love and which they would
hate. They explain their reasons.
Unit 5
111
Wordbuilder Affixes
6 Remind students that a suffix is a group of
letters added to the end of a word to change
its meaning. Ask them which three-letter suffix
can be added to all the nouns except one.
Answer
-ful
The odd one out is health (the adjective
from that is healthy).
Tip: Students may be tempted to add an extra
l to the -ful suffix, so remind them that
only the adverb suffix -fully has two ls.
7 Students work in pairs to think of things that
can be described as careful, colourful, harmful,
helpful, painful, peaceful, stressful, successful,
thoughtful and wonderful. Have pairs call out
their ideas and write the best ones on the
board.
8 Remind students that a prefix goes at the
beginning of a word and give them a couple
of minutes to think of a prefix or suffix that
creates the opposite meaning.
MA You may want to point out to stronger
students that sometimes different affixes can
be used for different meanings. For example,
helpless and unhelpful both exist, but mean
different things.
Answer
-less
It doesn’t work for health, peace, stress,
success or wonder. The opposites of their
adjectives are: unhealthy, noisy / loud,
unstressful, unsuccessful, awful / terrible.
Wordbuilder over9 Give students a couple of minutes to do the
matching in pairs, then check as a class and
elicit the meaning of over- (= more than, too
much).
Answers
1 overtake 2 overtime 3 oversleep
4 overweight 5 overcharge
6 overcrowded 7 overdone 8 overjoyed
112
Unit 5
10 Students quickly read the short paragraph and
complete it with over- words. Ask if they know
any other words that begin with over(eg overrated, overconfident).
Answers
1 overcrowded 2 overdone
3 overcharged 4 overjoyed
Extra idea: Students write sentences using
the other over- words from 9.
Focus on: get
a Students work in pairs to circle the words that
collocate with get, then answer the questions
as a class.
Answers
All the words can collocate with get.
1 get angry: become angry
get cold: become cold
get a cold: catch a viral illness that
makes you sneeze and cough
get dark: become dark
get dressed: put your clothes on
get an email: receive an email
get a feeling: have the impression
get a headache: have a pain in your
head
get home: arrive at your house
get an idea: have an idea
get ill: become unwell
get permission: be allowed to do
something
get a present: receive a gift
get good results: do well in an exam or
a test
get scared: become afraid
get started: begin something
get stuck: become trapped in
something or somewhere
get tickets: buy tickets
get tired: become tired
get upset: become upset
get well: recover from an illness / accident
2 No, it doesn’t.
3 Suggested answers: get married, get
divorced, get lost, get better, get up,
get out, get around, get together, get
a life, get there, get an award, get a
job, get a bargain, get a haircut, get
something to eat, get ready ...
b Students match the phrasal verbs with their
meanings.
Answers
1b 2g 3f
c
4e
5c
6a
7d
Students complete the sentences. Ensure they
use the correct form of get.
Answers
1 got back; get out of 2 getting on with
3 got rid of; get to; get off
Extra idea: Students match these
expressions from page 44 (1–3) with the
correct meaning (a–c), then use them to
complete the sentences below:
1 I gave up.
a) I couldn’t
think at all.
2 My mind went blank. b) I couldn’t do
it any more.
3 I froze.
c) I couldn’t
move.
1 When I turned over my exam paper and
looked at the questions, __________ .
2 When I saw the snake on the path in
front of me, __________ .
3 I felt so tired, I couldn’t make it to the
top. __________ .
Answers
1b 2a 3c
1 my mind went blank
3 I gave up
2 I froze
Unit 5
113
6
Consequences
UNIT
FOCUS
GRAMMAR: phrases for certainty and possibility; second conditional; past obligation and permission
VOCABULARY: animals and categories; the natural world; superfoods; medicine and health
FUNCTION: describing things
Introduction p51
Answers
1 They’re birds. They can’t fly, but they’re
still birds.
2 Only in the southern hemisphere,
mainly in Antarctica
3 They can control the rate of blood flow,
and they have special blood vessels.
4 No, whales do.
5 A liger – a cross between a male lion
and a female tiger (The opposite is a
tigon – a cross between a male tiger
and a female lion – but neither exists in
the wild.)
6 For up to two hours.
7 To express emotions – faces would be
much less expressive without them!
(They also prevent sweat dripping
down into their eyes, although this isn’t
mentioned in the recording.)
8 They help us to hold and handle objects
– it would be difficult otherwise.
9 Because the cells which give hair its
colour gradually die as we get older.
10 Nobody seems to know the answer
to this yet. You could ask students to
search online to see if they can find out
the answer.
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to introduce the concept
of certainty and possibility via a general knowledge
quiz. It also introduces some new animal
vocabulary and the general topic of the unit,
which is about answering intriguing questions,
mainly about what the consequences would be if
something happened.
Warm-up
Play a quick team game to review animal
vocabulary. Divide the class into two teams (A and
B) and ask each team to write a list of as many
animals (including birds and insects) as they can
think of in two minutes. When they’ve finished,
ask team A to say an animal; if team B doesn’t
have it on its list, team A wins a point. Repeat for
team B, and continue alternating between teams
until both teams’ lists are exhausted. The team
with the most points wins.
1 Tell students they’re going to do a general
knowledge quiz. First, they complete the
questions with the correct auxiliary verb.
Check their answers; they then discuss the
questions in groups of three or four. Tell them
that the questions get progressively harder!
Monitor their discussions, checking that they’re
using the phrases for expressing (un)certainty
correctly.
MA With weaker students, do the first gap-fill
(or even all ten) together to revise auxiliaries in
questions.
Answers
1 Are 2 do
6 can 7 do
3 don’t 4 Do 5 is
8 do 9 does 10 does
2 Compare answers as a class. Are there any
questions which everyone is sure about? Any
questions for which no one knows the answer?
Which things were the most interesting and
most surprising?
114
Unit 6
3
2.10 Play the recording for students to
match the conversations and questions.
Answers
A2 B5 C8
H 6 I 3 J 10
D1
E9
F7
G4
Transcript
A
man
Oh, I know that one: they only live in
the southern hemisphere, mainly in
Antarctica.
B
man
Isn’t a tiger the biggest cat?
woman No, it’s definitely a liger, with an ‘l’
– a cross between a male lion and a
female tiger.
man
woman
Really? I’ve never heard of that.
Well, it doesn’t exist in the wild.
And the opposite is a tigon – a cross
between a male tiger and a female
lion.
Answers
a) frog
b) parrot
c) salmon, shark
d) bee, butterfly, fly, mosquito, wasp
e) badger, bat, bear, dolphin, human,
mouse, rat, whale, zebra
f) snake
g) spider (Spiders are arachnids, which
have eight legs; insects have six.)
C
woman
man
I think it’s because they help us to
hold and handle objects – it would be
difficult otherwise. We’d drop things.
Really? I didn’t know that!
D
man
woman
They must be birds.
Yes, I agree. They can’t fly, but they’re
still birds because they have feathers
and a beak and they lay eggs.
Extra idea: Ask students to suggest other
ways of categorising the animals. Ask them
to share with a partner and explain.
E
woman
man
woman
Answers
Other possible categories: can fly / can’t fly;
dangerous / not dangerous; things we eat /
don’t eat; colourful / black, grey or brown;
can / can’t swim; in / not in your country
Note: These categories are not black and
white, and students should feel free to
discuss them. A bee, for example, could
be dangerous if someone is allergic to bee
stings.
I have no idea why we go grey. Do you
know?
I think it’s because the colour cells
which give hair its colour gradually die
as we get older.
Oh, right.
F
woman
I think it’s to express emotions – our
face would be much less expressive
without them!
G
man
No, whales do, but I don’t know why
whales need such large brains. All they
do is swim and eat!
H
man
woman
Possibly for up to two hours. I think I
read that somewhere.
That’s an awfully long time!
I
woman
man
woman
man
woman
No idea about penguin’s feet!
I think it might be something to do
with having special blood vessels to
control the rate of blood flow.
How on earth do you know that?
I read it somewhere.
Ah.
J
man
woman
4
I have no idea what the answer is.
I haven’t a clue!
You aren’t the only one. Nobody
knows!
Elicit the difference between amphibians,
mammals, reptiles, etc. Students then match
the animals to the correct categories. Ask
students which words are very similar in their
own language and which are very different.
5
EVERYBODY UP! Give students a few
minutes to look up interesting facts about the
animals online using their phones or tablets.
Monitor and help and correct as needed.
Look at the example as a class (Why do zebras
have stripes?) and see if anyone can guess
the answer. (There has never really been a
definitive answer to the question ‘Why do
zebras have stripes?’, but recent research
suggests that the stripes may help protect the
zebras against certain kinds of parasitic flies.)
Students walk around the room to ask and
answer each other’s questions. Remind them to
use the phrases of certainty and uncertainty.
MA Stronger students could write two or three
questions.
EXPLORE ONLINE
If there’s enough time, students can find out the
answers online and tell the class what they’ve
discovered. This can include answers to question
10 in the quiz and any answers in 5 that no one
could answer.
Unit 6
115
Did you know?
Reading
Write the question Does anything eat wasps? on
the board and try to elicit the answer. Encourage
students to use the phrases from 1 and ask if they
know any other strange book titles (there is an
annual competition to find the oddest book title –
students could find out more about this online).
1
2 Students read the article quickly and check if
their predictions were correct. How many of
their words from You first! were mentioned in
the article?
Answer
Yes. (And there’s a clue on the book cover!)
Bears, badgers, bats, rats, mice, frogs …
lots of animals do. Wasps are an important
part of the food chain.
Answer
No, we probably wouldn’t die, but life
would be more difficult.
3
Lesson 1 What would we do
without them? pp52–53
The focus of this lesson is vocabulary of the
natural world; the Grammar section highlights
the second conditional to talk about hypothetical
future situations. Students also read about the
importance of honey bees to the ecosystem and
discuss the consequences of extinction in the
natural world.
Pre-teach the expression come to mind (= think of
suddenly). Students make word associations with
the photo, then compare and explain their ideas
with a partner. Were they the same or different?
4 Students read the article again and work in
pairs to guess the meaning of words from the
context.
Answers
wax: a solid substance containing fat that
becomes soft and melts when warm
pollinate: something bees do to flowers
and plants that makes them produce seeds
pesticides: chemicals used to kill insects and
wild plants
parasites: animals or plants that live on
other animals or plants and feed off them
habitat: the natural environment where
things live
fill the gap: take over a job or vacancy
Suggested answers
honey, wax, dance, black and yellow, wings,
sting, hive, summer, flowers, buzz, nature, …
Background note
The western honey bee is native to Europe,
Asia and Africa, but was also introduced
to America in the 17th century. The honey
bee is of great importance to humans, as it
pollinates crops, orchards and fields. It also
provides wax and honey, which are used
in commercial products. Unfortunately,
European honey-bee populations face
threats to their survival from insecticides
and predators such as hornets, wasps and
dragonflies.
116
Unit 6
Students read and answer the questions in
pairs. Check answers in feedback.
Answers
1 They are dying because of pesticides,
parasites, disease and loss of habitat.
2 a) Other kinds of creature would
pollinate instead.
b) We could pollinate crops ourselves,
but it would take a lot of time and
money.
c) Food would be more expensive.
d) Life would be more difficult.
Aims
You first!
PREDICT Students discuss the question in
pairs. Check their ideas in feedback.
5
SEARCH AND THINK Students answer the
questions together, then check their ideas with
the article. For question 2, encourage them to
stretch themselves by making it into a game.
They get a point for every insect, animal or
food that no one else has thought of.
Suggested answers
1 a) insects: honey bees, other bees,
flies, butterflies, pesticides,
parasites, pollinate
b) animals: cows, pigs, sheep,
chickens, habitat, creatures, humans
c) food: honey, fruit, vegetables,
grasses, cereals, starve
3 cow: beef, pig: pork, sheep: lamb /
mutton, chickens: chicken
Extra idea: Write the name of an animal
on the board. Students think of another
animal whose name begins with the last
letter of the previous word (eg dog –
giraffe – elephant – tiger). Put them in
pairs to play the game. To make it more
challenging and fun, give them a time limit
of ten seconds to think of the next animal!
Grammar Second conditional
6 Students complete the sentences in the table.
Remind them they can look back at the article
to help them if necessary. They then answer
the questions and figure out the grammar rules
with a partner. Check answers in feedback.
Answers
1 Would 2 didn’t exist 3 disappeared
4 would 5 wouldn’t starve
6 disappeared
1 a) hypothetical situations in the present
or future
2 past simple
3 would / could + base form of the verb.
4 Would we die if honey bees didn’t
exist?
If there weren’t any honey bees, what
would we do without them?
If they disappeared completely, would
we starve?
If that ever happened, some other
creatures could help fill the gap.
If we did it ourselves, it would take a
lot of time and it would cost a lot of
money.
We probably wouldn’t starve if honey
bees disappeared.
Life would be a lot more difficult [if
honey bees disappeared].
Extra idea: Ask extra questions and draw
a timeline and scale on the board as shown
below to check students’ understanding
of the function and form of the second
conditional.
Look out for typical mistakes. Students
often confuse the first and second
conditional, so highlight the difference in
meaning (first conditional is more likely,
second conditional is unlikely). The past
tense verb in the if clause also confuses
them, so show them that the second
conditional is about a hypothetical future
and not the past.
1
2
If honey bees disappeared, life would be a
lot more difficult.
disappeared be difficult
past __________________________
future
X
X
now
possible, quite likely ____________
X unlikely
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
How many parts does the sentence
have? (two)
When is the sentence about? (the future)
Could honey bees disappear? (maybe)
What word tells us it is not definite? (if)
Is it likely or unlikely in the future?
(unlikely)
When do we use the second conditional?
(to talk about hypothetical, unlikely
events in the future)
What tense is the verb in the ‘if’ clause?
(past simple)
What word comes before the verb in the
result clause? (would / could)
You could also show inversion and ellipsis:
Life would be a lot more difficult if honey
bees disappeared.
•
•
Can we change the sentence like that?
(yes)
Is there anything different? (no comma)
Life would be a lot more difficult if honey
bees disappeared.
•
•
Have honey bees already been
mentioned? (yes)
Do we still understand the sentence?
(yes)
Unit 6
117
7
FINISH IT Students write their sentences;
alternatively, elicit possible endings from the
class. Encourage students to refer back to the
article if necessary. Then elicit different ways
of saying the second conditional sentences
(ie clause inversion, beginning with If we ...).
Suggested answers
We could help to protect honey bees
if we ...
stopped using pesticides.
protected their natural habitat.
stopped them catching diseases.
protected them as much as we can.
Suggested answers
1 disaster, Ice Age, Iceland, submarines,
wobble
2 climate, day, die, energy, humans,
photosynthesis, plants, sunlight, survive,
temperature, trees
3 cold, dark, lean over, moonlight, night,
oceans, orbit, tides, werewolves
Speaking and listening
10 Students discuss the questions in small groups.
Model the activity to encourage them to use
the words from 8 and the second conditional.
MA Stronger students could discuss both
questions.
Did you know?
Another interesting honey-bee fact is that they can
find their way to a particular area of flowers many
times, even if they are a long way away. They can
also communicate the location of the flowers to
other bees by doing a form of dance.
Take a break
Demonstrate how to ‘buzz’ a song – it’s similar to
humming, but uses the word buzz! Some students
may feel self-conscious doing this, so allow them
to work in groups of four if necessary, with each
pair choosing a song to ‘buzz’ to the other pair.
Vocabulary The natural world
8
Check students know the words in box.
You could either pre-teach them or tell them to
look them up in their dictionaries. Ask students
which words are very similar in their own
language and which are very different.
Extra idea: Make cards with the words
on. Put students into pairs or groups of
three and give them a set of word cards.
One student takes a card and describes
the word on it. The rest of the group has
to guess what the word is. Set a time limit
of three minutes, telling them that this is
to encourage them to go quickly and race
against the clock. The team that gets the
most correct answers wins.
9 Students answer the questions in pairs and put
the words from 8 into the correct category.
They should explain the reasons for their ideas.
118
Unit 6
Tip: It’s helpful to model activities. Even if
your instructions are super clear, students
sometimes lose concentration, don’t
listen carefully enough and are not sure
what to do. Giving an example and
modelling the activity provides a clear,
visual clue of the task and also reminds
students of language they can use.
11
Tell students they’re going to listen
to an interview about the sun and the moon.
They listen and check if their predictions from
10 were correct. The recording is quite long,
so you may want to play the section about the
moon, then pause it and play the information
about the sun afterwards. Check as a class if
there were any ideas that students thought
of which weren’t mentioned in the radio
interview (eg Some people have suggested
that because we wouldn’t produce vitamin D,
which helps absorb calcium, we’d all develop
bone diseases – but we wouldn’t live long
enough for that to be a problem!).
2.11
Answers
a) It would be darker without moonlight,
tides would be much smaller, the Earth
would wobble and lean over more,
resulting in shorter days and a more
extreme climate. There would be no
more werewolves, either.
b) It would be a disaster. The Earth’s
temperature would drop to –73˚C
within a year, part of all the oceans
would freeze, all plants (apart from
some large trees) would die, as they
wouldn’t be able to photosynthesise,
and the animals that eat those plants
(including humans) would also die.
Humans could possibly live under the
oceans in submarines or in countries
such as Iceland which have geothermal
energy.
interviewer
professor
interviewer
professor
Transcript
interviewer
professor
interviewer
professor
interviewer
professor
Good evening and welcome to
Sci-time, the radio programme
where we play with ideas and
try to answer all your What if …
questions. Last week, we talked
about bees. What if there were no
more bees? And this week, we’re
going to talk about the moon and
the sun. What if there was no
moon? What if there was no sun?
With me to discuss those questions
in the studio tonight is Professor
Ruth Patterson from Imperial
College, London. Very nice to have
you here, Professor Patterson,
thank you so much for coming.
It’s a pleasure.
Now then, we’ve had lots of emails
this week asking about the moon
and the sun. First of all, what
would happen to the world if
there was no moon? Would things
be very different? Would it be a
disaster?
Well, without moonlight, nights
would obviously be darker, but
that wouldn’t be too much of a
problem.
But there wouldn’t be any tides,
would there? Because tides
depend on the moon, don’t they?
The sea would stop coming in and
going out – the level would stay
the same.
Actually, there would still be tides,
because the sun also pulls the
oceans, but it’s true they would be
much, much smaller.
interviewer
professor
interviewer
professor
interviewer
professor
interviewer
So life wouldn’t be very different
without a moon?
Not radically different, no. Probably
the biggest effect would be that
the Earth would wobble and lean
over more as it spins. And, as a
result, we would have shorter days
and our climate would be more
extreme.
And I suppose there wouldn’t be
any werewolves? They only come
out at night when there’s a full
moon, don’t they?
No. Definitely no werewolves!
There wouldn’t be any romantic
songs about the moon either!
What about the sun? What would
happen to the world if there was
no sun?
Now that would be a disaster! The
Earth would get extremely cold.
Within a week, the temperature
would fall below 0° Fahrenheit
(that’s minus 17 degrees Celsius),
and within a year it would go
down to minus 100° Fahrenheit
(that’s minus 73 degrees Celsius!)
and the top part of all the oceans
would freeze, too.
Would anything survive?
No, not for long. Some large
trees could survive for several
decades, but most other plants
would die because they need the
sun’s energy for photosynthesis.
And that means, of course, that
the animals that eat those plants
would also die, and the animals
that eat those animals and so on.
Including humans.
Isn’t there anywhere humans could
go?
Well, we could live in submarines
at the bottom of the ocean, where
the water would be warmer, or we
could camp out in Iceland, which
has lots of geothermal energy! But
I don’t think either option would
be much fun!
No, I agree living on a submarine
forever would be absolutely awful.
It would be a nightmare. But
camping out in Iceland? That could
be interesting!
Unit 6
119
professor
interviewer
professor
interviewer
professor
But there’s another problem. The
sun doesn’t just heat the Earth.
It also keeps it in orbit. So if it
suddenly disappeared, we would
fly off into space!
Really? That sounds terrible!
Yes, it does. But don’t worry. It
isn’t going to happen. We’re just
speculating.
Well, that’s a relief. Professor
Patterson, thank you very much.
Thank you.
12 Students listen again and answer the questions
with a partner. Check answers in feedback.
Answers
1 The loss of the sun would be the
greater disaster because the Earth
would freeze and almost everyone and
everything would die.
2 Because they’re just speculating, it’s
very unlikely to happen.
13
Students answer the questions using the
second conditional. Do the first one with the
class as an example (If there was no moon,
the Earth would be darker). Monitor, help and
correct as needed.
Answers
1 If there was no moon, the Earth would
be darker.
If there was no moon, the tides would
be smaller.
If there was no moon, the days would
be shorter.
If there was no moon, the climate
would be more extreme.
2 There wouldn’t be any stories about
werewolves or romantic songs about
the moon.
3 If there was no sun, temperatures
would fall.
If there was no sun, the oceans would
freeze.
If there was no sun, some trees would
survive for a while.
If there was no sun, plants and animals
would die.
If there was no sun, we would fly off
into space.
120
Unit 6
Writing and speaking
14 Write What if ... didn’t exist? on the board and
tell students to choose a topic to write about.
Give them about five or ten minutes to find
out information and make notes using their
smartphones or tablets. Walk around and offer
help and useful language if necessary.
15 MINI-TALK Students use their notes from 14
and prepare a short talk about their topic. Put
them in pairs and encourage them to read and
correct each other’s work. Then put them in
small groups to give their talks. Walk around,
making notes of good sentences and any small
mistakes you hear. Get feedback and highlight
good uses of English.
Extra idea: To introduce the topic,
show a movie trailer of An Inconvenient
Truth (https://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=Bu6SE5TyrCM). Elicit students’
reactions to the clip and global warming,
then encourage them to find out more
about endangered species, deforestation,
global warming and pollution.
Tell them to choose a topic and make a
short presentation. Provide links to websites
like https://www.worldwildlife.org and
http://www.foei.org.
Lesson 2 Hamburgers and
pies! pp54–55
Aims
The focus of this lesson is to read about the
film Super Size Me, which focused on junk food
and health problems in the USA. The Grammar
section introduces modal verbs to describe past
obligation and permission, and students talk about
McDonald’s and eating at restaurants and listen to
a famous song about American culture.
Reading and writing
1 To introduce the topic, write hamburger on
the board and tell students to look at the
photo. They make a vocabulary network or
word fountain, writing all the words that
come to mind. Students might have different
opinions, so encourage positive and negative
ideas before they read the article. They then
compare with a partner and see what words
they both included.
Extra idea: Ask personalised questions
and encourage conversation. Dictate the
questions and put students in pairs to
discuss:
Do you like McDonald’s [or another fastfood restaurant]? Why? / Why not?
How often do you eat there?
What things do you usually eat and drink?
Could you eat that sort of thing every day?
What do you think would happen if you
did?
Would you be ‘lovin’ it’?!*
* This is a reference to McDonald’s strapline
in their advertisements (I’m lovin’ it). Omit this
question if students are unlikely to know this.
2
PREDICT Students read the title of the article
and the purple introductory text and predict
what happened and why Morgan became so
heavy.
MA Telling weaker students that they’re going
to read about a film called Super Size Me may
give them an extra clue.
Extra ideas: Ask students to predict five
things they expect to see in the article. You
could also show them the Super Size Me
movie trailer at: https://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=I1Lkyb6SU5U.
Ask students what they think about
accelerated weight gain like this, and what
the causes might be. However, you need to
be very careful with this subject, as it can
easily get too personal if any students have
weight issues, or have had them in the
past. Make sure you keep any discussion
very general unless students themselves
volunteer the information.
Background note
Super Size Me is a 2004 American
documentary film directed by and
starring Morgan Spurlock, an American
independent filmmaker. Spurlock’s film
follows a 30-day period from 1 February
to 2 March, 2003, during which he ate
only McDonald’s food. The film documents
this lifestyle’s dramatic effect on Spurlock’s
physical and psychological well-being, and
explores the fast-food industry’s corporate
influence, including how it encourages
poor nutrition and finds its way into the
hearts of young children for its own profit.
Super Size Me is a movie that sheds a
new light on what has become one of
America’s biggest health problems: obesity.
At the end of the experiment, Spurlock
had gained 11kg in weight and had done
irreparable damage to his liver. Morgan
Spurlock won the Best Director award at
the 2004 Sundance Film Festival, and the
film was also nominated for an Academy
Award for Best Documentary.
3 Set a time limit so students read quickly for
gist in order to check how many of their
predictions were correct. Get their reactions to
the article in feedback.
4
THINK Students discuss the questions in
pairs. Check answers together in feedback.
Answers
1 The title is ambiguous. Junk could mean
‘junk food’ or it could mean ‘rubbish’,
‘nonsense’, ‘stupid ideas’, etc.
2 a) It may have influenced McDonald’s
decision to withdraw super-size
meals and start offering salads.
b) He made a lot of money from his film,
but he gained 11 kilos and he had
physical and mental health problems.
c) A lot of people saw the film, and it
brought the topic to their attention.
5 Students work in pairs to read the definitions
and find the words in the text. Check together
in feedback.
Answers
1 period 2 concerned 3 amount
4 apparently 5 discontinued 6 options
7 gain 8 issues 9 depressed 10 severe
Extra idea: Ask students what super
means (= bigger, better or more than
usual). Tell them to circle all the words to
do with size or quantity in the text.
Answers
nothing, 30, huge, enormous, amount (of),
three, everything, once, 5,000, more or less,
a lot of
Unit 6
121
6 Students read and answer the questions.
Check answers in feedback.
Answers
1 He wanted to see what would
happen if he ate nothing but food
from McDonald’s for a period of 30
days. / Because he was worried about
the obesity epidemic across the USA
and the huge profits that fast-food
companies were making. He was also
worried about junk-food advertising
aimed at children.
2 First, he had to eat three McDonald’s
meals a day. Second, he had to try
everything on the menu at least once
and he couldn’t eat anything that
wasn’t on the menu.
3 It made a lot of money, won awards
and raised awareness of the issue.
It may also have contributed to
McDonald’s decision to withdraw the
supersize option.
4 Some people said that any diet
high in calories and fat (and low in
vitamins and minerals) might have
caused Spurlock’s weight gain and
health issues, not just a McDonald’s
one. The lack of exercise may have
contributed too. The film was also
criticised for being vegan propaganda.
5 He suffered from both mental and
physical health problems: he was
depressed and tired, he had headaches,
and he had severe and permanent liver
damage.
Extra idea: Write It’s Quiz Time! on the
board. Put students in pairs and ask them
to write five comprehension questions
about the article. Tell them to make the
questions difficult, but the answers have to
be located in the article (so a question like
What pets does Morgan have? isn’t a good
question because the answer isn’t in the
article!).
When they’ve finished, put students in
new groups of three, so the group has 15
questions. Tell them to ask and answer
each other’s questions and see who can get
the most correct answers.
122
Unit 6
Tip: Asking students to write their own
comprehension questions and then
putting them in new groups to quiz each
other practises reading, writing, speaking
and listening skills and is also an enjoyable
variation from the course book. It’s
learner-centred, maximises students’ work
and minimises your involvement too!
7 Students summarise the article using the ideas
in each paragraph. You may or may not want
to help them start off the other four sentences
too:
1 Spurlock made the film because he was
concerned about three things: firstly ...
secondly ... and thirdly ...
2 Two of the rules he made himself follow
were …
3 The film was successful because …
4 But some people said …
5 And afterwards Spurlock …
As a follow-up, ask students to make up
alternative titles for the article (eg McDonald’s
Man in Disaster Diet). Get feedback and vote
for the best, funniest or strangest title.
Grammar Past obligation and permission
8 Students complete the table using the past
forms. Elicit the answers in feedback.
Answers
1 had to 2 had to 3 didn’t have to
4 could 5 couldn’t
Extra idea: Students often confuse have
to and must, especially when talking about
past obligation and permission, so watch
out for mistakes like It was Saturday, so I
mustn’t go to school or I couldn’t ate. Give
clear examples and context and also show
the function and meaning through time
lines and scales like the following:
I had to do an exam last Saturday. It was
necessary.
I couldn’t eat in the exam. It wasn’t
allowed
had to work
couldn’t eat
past ___________________________
future
X
now
choice ______________________X no choice
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When is the sentence about? (the past)
What words show it’s the past? (had to,
couldn’t; last Saturday, was, wasn’t)
Did I have a choice? (no)
Do we change the main verb into the
past? (no)
Which part do we change to the past?
(the auxiliary verb: had to, couldn’t)
•
•
•
•
9 Elicit the first example from the class, then
ask students to find and underline other past
obligation sentences.
Answers
First, he had to eat three McDonald’s meals
a day.
Second, he had to try everything on the
menu at least once.
He couldn’t eat anything that wasn’t on the
menu.
He didn’t have to supersize his meal unless
he was asked to do so.
Extra idea: Review past modals of
deduction in paragraphs C and D. These
were covered in Unit 3. Ask questions to
see if students understand the meaning
and see the difference in probability.
McDonald’s [...] began to offer healthier
options like salads instead, but that could
have been a coincidence.
Any diet high in calories and fat [...] might
have caused Spurlock’s weight gain and
health issues ...
The lack of exercise must have
contributed too.
Spurlock’s partially vegan diet may also
have been responsible for his health
problems.
• When did these things happen? (the
past)
• What words tell us it’s the past? (have
been, have caused, have contributed,
have been)
• Are we certain Spurlock’s McDonald’s
diet caused his problems? (no)
• Are we sure that McDonald’s
discontinued the Super Size meals
because of the film? (no)
Do we know the lack of exercise
contributed? (no)
Do we know his vegan diet was
responsible for his health problems? (no)
What words show that we aren’t sure?
(could, might, must, may)
Which word shows we are fairly sure
about something? (must)
Why? (Because we know exercise and an
active lifestyle are important.)
Which words show we are less certain?
(could, might, may)
10 EVERYBODY UP! To introduce the activity,
show a photo of yourself when you were a
child or tell a story about the things you ate
and meals at home.
Check students know the meaning of sweets
(= food with lots of sugar, candy), allergy
(= bad reaction or sickness because of certain
food or things) and greens (= vegetables). They
walk around the room, asking and answering
each other’s questions.
MA Help weaker students by eliciting the
questions on the board first to help them:
When you were a child, ...
did you have to finish everything on your
plate?
could you eat as many sweets as you wanted?
were there any types of food you couldn’t eat
because of an allergy?
did you have to eat your greens?
Speaking
11 Students talk about two of the questions in
small groups.
MA Stronger students discuss all three; weaker
students talk about just one.
Extra idea: Put students in pairs and give
them each a role card (see page 124).
They read their role card and think of
questions and answers they could say in
the interview. They then do the interview
about the ‘Super Size Me’ experiment.
Ask volunteers to do their interviews in
feedback.
Unit 6
123
Journalist
You are a journalist. Think of questions
you can ask Morgan about the ‘Super
Size Me’ experiment (eg Why did you
do it? What were the rules? How did
you feel?).
Interview Morgan about the film and
his experience.
Morgan Spurlock
You made the film Super Size Me.
You are meeting a journalist to do an
interview. Think of details about the
experiment, the film (eg reasons for the
film, the rules, what happened). Talk
to the journalist and answer his / her
questions.
Song link
This activity could be done as homework or in
class. Students find out more about this iconic
song and answer the questions in pairs. They can
use their smartphones to search for information
online, and they could use Wikipedia to search
for the information and Metrolyrics for the lyrics –
they’ll need both.
Answers
1 Something else
2 The song is about the death of Buddy
Holly, Ritchie Valens and Jiles Perry
Richardson junior (the Big Bopper) in a
plane crash on 3 February, 1959. The
music of the 1950s was Don McLean’s
favourite music and Buddy Holly was his
hero, hence the line ‘the day the music
died’.
3 Apple pie was a symbol of the
American dream in the 1950s. When
those singers died, McLean felt that
part of the American dream died with
them.
124
Unit 6
Culture note
Don McLean is an American folk / rock
singer, born 2 October, 1945, in New York.
He is best known for his two number-one
hits from his second album: American
Pie and Vincent. American Pie, released
in 1971, is so long (nearly nine minutes)
that when it was originally released as a
single, it had to be split over both sides
of the record, with the result that some
radio stations only ever played the first
half of the song. McLean has described
the song as ‘somewhat autobiographical’,
presenting an abstract story of his life
from the mid-1950s to the late 1960s
when he wrote the song. The one specific
detail that he has confirmed is that he was
folding newspapers for his paper round on
4 February, 1959, when he first heard the
news of the plane crash. This gave rise to
the line ‘February made me shiver / with
every paper I’d deliver’. He has also said
that the references in the song to ‘the king’
and ‘the jester’ are to Elvis Presley and Bob
Dylan respectively. The working manuscript
for American Pie sold at auction in 2015 for
over £800,000 (over $1 million), making it
the third highest auction price ever paid for
a literary manuscript.
12 Students look at the ingredients and
instructions for making apple pie. Put them
in pairs, but don’t allow them to look at each
other’s information. They ask each other
questions using the amounts and adverbs of
quantity to complete the recipe.
Check students understand the different
measures and amounts. You could also quickly
review questions with How much / many ...?
Answers
2 pastry 3 apples 4 ingredients
6 pastry 9 cream; ice-cream.
13 VIDEO OPTION Students write about
their favourite restaurant, answering the
questions. They then video their talks on their
smartphones. They can either upload their
videos or walk around the room and show
each other.
Extra idea: Do a guided visualisation with
the class. Tell students to relax and close
their eyes. Tell them to imagine they’re at
a restaurant. Play some gentle background
music to relax them even more and help
them picture the scene. As the music plays,
gently prompt them and guide them:
You’re in your favourite restaurant. Where
is it? Who are you with? Sit down and look
at the menu. Order your favourite food and
a drink. What can you see? What can you
hear? How do you feel? Ah! Here comes
your meal! What does it taste like? What
can you smell? How do you feel?
When the music stops, ask them to open
their eyes and to describe the restaurant
to their partner. Get feedback and find out
more about what they could see, hear, feel,
smell and taste. This is a great activity, as it
generates so many different ideas, is really
personalised and leads to lots of learner
interaction and speaking.
Lesson 3 Magic or myth?
pp56–57
Aims
The focus of this lesson is on ‘superfoods’ that
have amazing healing properties and health
benefits. Students learn food-, medicine- and
health-related vocabulary and also listen to
conversations about home remedies from around
the world.
You first!
Put students in pairs to discuss the things they eat
and explain the reasons why. Get quick feedback
and ask extra questions (Really? How often? Do
you eat it on its own or with something else?
What do you make with it?). Don’t worry too
much if students don’t know the names of all the
foods at this stage, as this will be covered in 1.
They can just say this.
Vocabulary 1 Superfoods
1
Students cover the box and see how many
of the foods in the photos they can name.
They then look at the words in the box. They’ll
already know some of these, but there will
be a few more unusual, interesting and crosscultural ones as well. They then match the
words and photos. Ask students which words
are very similar in their own language and
which are very different.
Answers
1 honey 2 acai berries 3 miso
4 coconut 5 artichoke 6 ginger
7 Brazil nuts 8 turmeric 9 pineapple
10 kiwi fruit 11 garlic
2
Write acai berries on the board. Elicit
which syllable is stressed. Write the word in
phonemic script too /ˌæsaɪˈiː ˈberiz/ and ask
students to repeat. They then listen and repeat,
underlining the stressed syllables in each word.
2.12
Answers
acai berries, artichoke, Brazil nuts, coconut,
garlic, ginger, honey, kiwi fruit, miso,
pineapple, turmeric
Extra idea: Students work in pairs to write
down as many fruit and vegetables as they
can. The team that has the most wins. As
a follow-up, write the words on the board
and give the class 30 seconds to look at
them. Then wipe the words away and see
how many they can remember.
3 Ask the questions and elicit ideas from the
class. Ask why foods is plural here. Students
guess using degrees of certainty from page 51.
Answer
Food is usually an uncountable noun.
However, when we talk about ‘a type of
food’ (like superfoods), we can use it in the
plural form.
Background note
A ‘superfood’ is a type of food that is
considered to be very good for your health
and which may even help some medical
conditions. Superfood lists contain common
food choices whose nutritional value has
been long recognised as exceptional.
Examples of these are berries, nuts and
seeds in general, dark green vegetables
(such as spinach and broccoli), citrus fruits,
fish (such as salmon and sardines) and
peanuts, lentils and beans. Some critics
Unit 6
125
claim that the word is just a marketing
term to help sell certain products and the
benefits are often disputed by scientific
studies.
Find out more about superfoods at http://
www.history.com/news/hungry-history/theancient-origins-of-superfoods and https://
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Superfood.
Vocabulary 2 Medicine and health
4
GUESS Students read the text and guess
which food item it is about. They then compare
their ideas in pairs.
Answer
Honey
Background note
The honey in question is not just any old
honey, it is manuka honey, also known
as surgihoney. It is produced in Australia
and New Zealand from the nectar of the
manuka tree. Although there are some
doubts as to the scientific basis for the
antibacterial qualities of manuka honey,
it has become very expensive and thus a
target for fraud. Over half of the samples
tested in 2012–2013 were found not to be
manuka honey at all, despite being labelled
as such.
5
SEARCH AND THINK Students find the
words and meanings. They can use their
dictionaries to help them.
Answers
1 There are actually 16 words or phrases:
medicine: healing properties, treat,
penicillin, antibiotics, doctors, medicine,
scientists, patients, hospital, operation
disease: infection, superbugs,
resistance, bacteria, MRSA, E. coli
Listening 1
6
126
Students listen and tick the words they
highlighted as they hear them. Play and pause
the recording as necessary; students compare
their ideas afterwards.
2.13
Unit 6
Answers
medicine, infection, operation, antibiotics,
doctors, bacteria, penicillin, scientists
Transcript
sunita What are you doing, Joe?
joe
Oh, just looking at this website a
Mexican friend of mine told me
about. It’s all about natural products in
medicine. It’s fascinating.
sunita Uh-huh. So what have you found out?
joe
Well, my friend Maria had a really bad
infection after an operation – it went
on for days and antibiotics didn’t get rid
of it, and then finally someone told her
to try honey – manuka honey, in fact –
so she did, and the infection completely
healed. Completely!
sunita Really?
joe
Yes, really. So I’m just looking it up to
see what I can find out, and there’s
loads of stuff if you just google manuka
honey.
sunita For example?
joe
There’s a true story about a man from
Wales – he used to keep fish.
sunita Fish?
joe
Yes, koi, and one day he got a cut from
one of them. He wasn’t worried about
it, but then the cut became infected
and turned into a terribly painful skin
condition and it got so bad that he
found himself in a wheelchair – he
couldn’t walk.
sunita My goodness! How awful!
joe
Yes, and then his doctors started to talk
about amputation, so the man thought
‘Right, that’s it!’ and he decided he had
to find a different solution. And guess
what? He discovered it in Venezuela,
from a street doctor. The guy told him
to put honey dressings on his legs. So
he did, and five months later, he was
walking again!
sunita Really? How amazing! So how did this
honey thing all start?
joe
Apparently on a farm in Chile. The
owner noticed that the honey in his
beehives didn’t go off, even in warm
weather. It stayed fresh. So it must have
something special which protected it
against bacteria.
sunita
joe
sunita
joe
sunita
joe
sunita
joe
7
So it was a lucky accident? Sounds
a bit like Alexander Fleming and the
discovery of penicillin.
Yeah, I suppose it was a bit. Anyway,
later on, scientists got interested
and managed to produce a medical,
antibacterial honey. It’s sometimes
called surgihoney.
That is interesting. So what exactly do
you do with it? Do you eat it?
Well, you certainly can eat it. Some
people say eating it helps to prevent
and treat cancer or reduce high
cholesterol. But most people use it
directly on wounds or skin infections or
burns.
What, you just put it straight on your
skin?
Absolutely. But not just any old honey,
remember. It needs to be a special
medical honey.
Oh right. Sounds a bit sticky.
Yeah, sticky, but it works!
Answers
1 A website about natural products in
medicine
2 She had a bad infection after an
operation.
3 He got a cut from one of his koi fish.
4 It got infected and he ended up in a
wheelchair because he couldn’t walk.
5 His doctors started to talk about
amputation; he heard about manuka
honey from a street doctor in Venezuela.
6 He noticed that the honey in his
beehives didn’t go off, even in warm
weather. It stayed fresh. So it must have
something special which protected it
against bacteria.
7 You can eat it, but most people put it on
their skin.
TAKEAWAY LANGUAGE Students match
the expressions from the recording with the
meanings.
4e
5b
Extra idea: As a follow-up, students
write a short story that includes each of
the phrases. They then delete the phrases
from their story and leave gaps. Finally,
they tell their stories to a partner and say
Boo! instead of each missing phrase. Their
partner has to guess which phrase fits the
sentence correctly.
Speaking and writing
9 Pre-teach claim (= a belief that something is
true, though there may not be proof). Students
match the sentences to the photos. Don’t
confirm their answers at this stage.
Answers
1 miso 2 acai berries 3 ginger
4 Brazil nuts 5 artichoke 6 vinegar
7 pineapple 8 coconut 9 kiwi fruit
Students try to remember the answers. Play
the recording again so they can check.
MA With weaker classes, give students time to
read the questions first before asking them to
listen and write the answers.
8
Answers
1c 2d 3a
Tip: It’s great if students know the answers,
but if they don’t, just encourage them
to guess – at least there’s a chance
they might get it right! This is a good
technique for them to learn, especially
when they’re doing exams. It’s also
important for them to have a safe
atmosphere where their ideas will be
appreciated and praised even if they’re
not quite right.
10
Students listen and check their ideas
together. Play and pause the recording as
necessary.
2.14
Transcript
1 Miso can apparently help prevent certain
types of cancer and give protection from
radiation.
2 Many people believe that acai berries give
you energy, help you lose weight and also
slow down the aging process!
3 They say that ginger is really good for colds,
flu and respiratory problems.
4 Brazil nuts apparently have a powerful
positive effect on your brain.
Unit 6
127
5 Artichoke may help your digestion and it
also lowers cholesterol.
6 Vinegar can possibly help to regulate blood
sugar levels.
7 Pineapple is especially good for your eyes
and your skin as you get older.
8 Apparently coconut oil is excellent for your
hair and skin.
9 They say that eating kiwi fruit can help
prevent skin cancer and is also good for
depression.
Extra idea: Elicit which two superfoods
from 1 were not featured in the recording
(turmeric and garlic); students find out
what beneficial properties they’re supposed
to have.
11 YOUR STORY Students talk about their own
personal experiences with alternative medicine.
If they don’t have any, they can talk about the
type of food they eat to stay fit and healthy.
Check their ideas in feedback.
EXPLORE ONLINE
This can be done as homework or in class using
smartphones or tablets. Ensure that students
understand all the items in the box. Alternatively,
students find out more about one of the items on
page 56.
12 MINI-TALK Put students in small groups.
They give a short talk about their superfood
but don’t say what it is. The other students
have to listen and guess.
Listening 2 and speaking
13 GUESS Students look at the photos and
guess the remedies. Encourage them to use
the phrases to express degrees of certainty
from the unit.
14
2.15 Students listen to the recording and
number the photos in order.
Answers
a) 5 b) 4
c) 1
d) 6
e) 2
f) 3
Transcript
1 I get hiccups quite often, and I find that
if I have a spoonful of sugar, it gets rid of
them.
128
Unit 6
2 Chocolate! It’s really good for coughs.
I don’t know why. And it’s delicious of
course.
3A: Peanut butter. It’s great for getting
chewing gum out of your hair.
B: Why on earth would you have chewing
gum in your hair in the first place?
4 Vinegar is brilliant for sunburn. I was
terribly burnt once and someone put
vinegar all over me and the burn went
away. I’d recommend it for a blocked drain,
too.
5 I eat cherries to help me go to sleep.
I heard that’s because they contain
melatonin.
6 And toothpaste can get rid of spots. Did
you know that? It can get rid of stains like
ink and lipstick, too. And it can clean piano
or keyboard keys!
15 Students listen again and check if their
predictions from 13 were correct. What things
can each food item good for?
Answers
1 Sugar gets rid of hiccups.
2 Chocolate is good for coughs.
3 Peanut butter is good for getting
chewing gum out of your hair.
4 Vinegar is good for soothing sunburn
and unblocking drains.
5 Cherries are good for helping you sleep.
6 Toothpaste gets rid of spots (and gets
rid of stains like ink and lipstick, and
cleans piano or keyboard keys).
16 VIDEO OPTION Students write about their
favourite magic home remedy and then video
their talks on their smartphones. They can
either upload them or walk around the room
and show each other.
Extra idea: Use short speaking activities to
encourage learner interaction. Put students
in pairs to talk about the things they do
to stay fit and healthy. Should they eat
differently to stay healthy? What things
should we do / avoid to live a long life?
Everyday English p58
Answers
1 A simple tin opener.
2 Really dangerous. Really, really
dangerous.
3 A simple, safe tin opener.
4 Not an electric one.
5 A simple, safe, manual tin opener.
Describing things
1
2.16 Students listen and answer the
questions.
Answers
He wants a tin opener, but the shop
doesn’t sell them, so he’s not successful.
Transcript
man
Good morning. I wonder if you can
help me. I’d like a thing for opening
tins.
assistant Sorry?
man
You know, something I can use to
open tins with.
assistant Oh. You mean a tin opener?
man
Yes, that’s it. A tin opener! One that’s
very easy to use.
assistant So, a simple tin opener.
man
Yes, a simple tin opener, and one that
won’t cut me when I use it. Some of
them are terrible. Really dangerous.
Really, really dangerous.
assistant So, you want a simple, safe tin
opener.
man
Exactly! And not an electric one, of
course – I’m going camping.
assistant So, a simple, safe, manual tin opener.
Is that right?
man
That’s it exactly! Do you have one of
those?
assistant I’m sorry. We don’t sell tin openers
here!
Tip: If students can’t hear the word stress
easily, hum the ‘tune’ of the sentence
and ask them to copy. Then say the
words in the same tune!
4 P Students practise pronunciation and
intonation by responding to the questions. Do
the first one together as an example.
Suggested answers
1 No, it’s really difficult.
2 No, it’s really boring.
3 No, I’d prefer sparkling.
4 No, I’d like it white, please.
5 No, I’d like baked fish, please.
6 No, I’d like it well done.
5 Students match the items from A and B.
Alternatively, shout out items in a random
order from box A. Students have to respond
with the correct word from box B. Students
then describe the item to each other; their
partner has to guess what it is. Encourage
them to use the expressions from 2.
Answers
bicycle pump, bin liner, bottle opener,
clothes brush, coffee maker, insect
repellent, lemon squeezer, phone charger,
potato peeler, stain remover
2 Students listen again and complete the
sentence in two different ways. Play the
recording again if necessary, giving them time
to write sentences.
Answers
I’d like a thing for opening tins.
I’d like something I can use to open tins
with.
2.17 Students listen and underline the
3 P
stressed syllables in each sentence. They then
practise and repeat together.
6
ROLE-PLAY Students do their own role-plays
in pairs using the language for describing
things. They can look back at the transcript to
help them if necessary.
7
GUESS Students look at the photo and
answer the questions. Ask extra personalised
questions (eg Where were you? Did you like it?
Do you know the ingredients?).
Unit 6
129
Answer
Custard is a thick, sweet sauce made from
milk, flour, eggs and sugar, sometimes
flavoured with vanilla. It is often used as an
accompaniment for hot desserts such as
pies, crumbles and sponges.
8
Students listen to the recording and fill
in the gaps, then compare with a partner. Elicit
why these words and phrases are used (Vague
language is useful when we don’t want or
need to say things exactly.).
2.18
Answers
1 a sort of 2 stuff 3 a bit like
4 [thick]ish, [yellow]ish 5 for putting
6 to have
9
Write the sentences with lots of gaps
as a dictagloss (see below). Play the recording
just once without pausing; students then try
to remember what she said exactly! The idea is
that they won’t be able to fill in all of the gaps.
They find a partner and dictate what they have
to each other. They then change pairs and
continue until they’ve completed the dialogue.
The first person to finish is the winner.
To increase the speaking and learner
interaction, students can only talk to one
partner at a time and they can’t show each
other what they’ve written.
2.19
You __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ custard __________?
It’s a __________ __________ __________
__________ with __________ , __________
and __________ and __________ __________
__________ __________ __________
or __________ __________ __________
__________ ! Is __________ __________ ?
Answer and transcript
[You] want to know precisely what [custard]
is? [It’s a] sweet, yellow sauce made [with]
eggs, milk [and] sugar [and] you can eat it hot
[or] cold with your pudding! [Is] that clearer?
10 Students discuss the questions in pairs.
Encourage them to ask extra questions (eg
Where were you when you ate it? Did you like
it? What other foreign food do you like?).
130
Unit 6
Culture notes
• Bouillabaisse is a traditional fish stew
from Provence in France. There are
at least three different kinds of fish
or seafood in a bouillabaisse, and it’s
traditionally served with rouille, a type
of mayonnaise made of olive oil, garlic,
saffron and cayenne pepper.
• Paella is a rice dish from the Valencia
region of Spain. It’s often regarded
as Spain’s national dish and comes in
various types, including seafood paella
and mixed paella.
• Goulash is a Hungarian stew made of
meat and vegetables, seasoned with
paprika and other spices.
• Feijoada is a Portuguese dish made with
beans, beef and pork.
• Ceviche is a seafood dish popular in
South America. It’s made of fresh raw
fish cured in citrus juices and spiced
with chilli.
• Borscht is a beetroot soup of Ukrainian
origin, now popular in much of Eastern
and Central Europe.
• Karniyarik is a dish from Turkey
consisting of aubergine stuffed with
onions, garlic, tomatoes and ground
meat.
• Dulce de leche is a South American
speciality made by slowing heating
sweetened milk.
• Tiramisu is an Italian dessert made of
coffee-flavoured sponge fingers layered
with a creamy mixture of eggs, sugar,
cream and mascarpone cheese and
chocolate.
• Moussaka is an aubergine-and-potatobased dish from Greece and Turkey.
• Guacamole is an avocado-based dip
originally created by the Aztecs in what
is now Mexico. It has become part of
American cuisine as a dip to go with
tacos.
• Kimchi is a traditional fermented
Korean dish made of vegetables with
a variety of seasonings. It’s often
described as spicy and sour.
11 Students describe and guess other types
of food from 10 using the vague language
from 8.
Vocabulary plus p67
Focus on: the earth
Irregular plurals
a Students work in pairs and take turns to ask
and answer the questions. Encourage them
to use intonation to express surprise – what
may sound exaggerated to them may sound
perfectly natural in context.
1 Write two column headings on the board
– singular and plural. Students come to the
board, write the word from the box in the
‘single’ column, then complete the ‘plural’
column with the correct word. Encourage the
other students to gently correct any mistakes.
Answer
person – people, man – men,
woman – women, child – children, foot – feet,
tooth – teeth, fly – flies, goose – geese,
leaf – leaves, half – halves, wolf – wolves,
ox – oxen, salmon – salmon, sheep – sheep
MA Remind weaker students that adding
on earth doesn’t change the meaning of the
question – they can take it out to see more
easily what the question is.
b
Transcript
1 a Where on earth have you been?
b
Nowhere!
2 a What on earth are you doing?
b
Nothing!
3 a Why on earth didn’t you tell me?
b
Because I thought you’d be really cross,
and I was right!
4 a Who on earth was that woman?
b
Oh, just someone I met on holiday.
No one special.
5 a What on earth do you mean?
b
I mean that I’ve changed my mind!
6 a How on earth did you get here?
b
Well, the flight was cancelled, so I took
a bus to the station and caught the
train!
Extra idea: Ask students if they know any
other irregular plurals, eg fish – fish, deer –
deer, medium – media, crisis – crises, hoof
– hooves, loaf – loaves.
Phrasal verbs More or less of something
2 Students do the matching individually, then
check with a partner.
Answers
1d 2a 3e
4b
5c
3 Students work in their pairs to rewrite the
sentences. Get feedback and correct any
mistakes.
Answers
1 Have you ever suddenly put on a lot of
weight?
2 Might the world run out of oil one day?
3 Is the cost of living going down or
(going) up right now?
4 What can we do to cut down carbon
emissions?
4 Students discuss the questions in groups of
three or four. Encourage them to be sensitive
about the first question, as not everyone is
comfortable discussing their weight.
Play the dialogues for students to
compare their responses.
2.26
c
P
Play the recording again for students to
listen for the stressed words in the questions.
Answers
See underlining in transcript above.
Extra idea: Play the recording and ask
students to read along at the same time,
shadowing the intonation of the speakers.
d Read the example together. Students then
work in pairs to choose one of the questions
and construct a short conversation. They can
use the initial response given on the recording
in b or their own response from a.
MA Stronger students can do two or three
of these conversations; weaker students can
just practise the two-line exchanges from the
recording.
Unit 6
131
Wordbuilder Compound nouns
5 Students quickly look at the words in the boxes
and check that they know them all. Elicit that
all the words in A are parts of the body. Then
give students five minutes to form as many
compound nouns as they can. You could make
this a team game, with the team with the
most correct compounds winning. If necessary,
remind students that some parts of the body
can go with more than one word.
Answers
armchair, background, earring, eyeball,
eyebrow, eyelid, eye line, fingernail,
fingerprint, football, footprint, handball,
hand print, handwriting, headline, lipstick,
necklace, neckline, toenail, toothpaste
Background note
Most of these compounds have been
around for a long time, so are written as
one word. The origins of some compounds
– such as necklace – aren’t immediately
obvious, although this probably meant ‘lace
that was put around the neck’ at some
point.
6 Go through the example with the class to
make sure that students understand what they
have to do. They work in pairs to write their
sentence / question. Feed back as a class to see
who had the funniest / strangest sentence.
MA Stronger students can write two or three
sentences / questions.
Wordbuilder dis7 Check that students understand the negative
meaning of the prefix dis- using the example;
they then work in pairs to work out the words.
MA Weaker students start with items 3 and 5,
as these are easier.
Answers
1 disappear 2 disagree 3 dislike
4 disabled 5 disadvantage 6 disapprove
132
Unit 6
8 Check that students understand the
vocabulary, such as facilities (= buildings,
equipment and services provided for a
particular purpose), freelance (= doing
particular pieces of work for different
companies rather than working all the time for
just one) and litter (= small pieces of rubbish
that have been left lying around in public).
They complete the sentences, then discuss
them with a partner. Get feedback to find out
the majority opinion for each sentence.
Answers
1 disappear 2 disabled 3 dislike
4 disadvantages 5 disapprove
Units 5&6 Review
Aims
To review the vocabulary and grammar covered in
Units 5 and 6. Students also look at the art form of
the mini-saga and different natural remedies from
around the world.
3 Pre-teach words like reasonable (= fair) and
traces (= a very small amount, a sign that
something happened). Students read and
identify the story that isn’t a mini-saga.
Answers
1 B is not a mini-saga, as it has more than
50 words.
3 They are all about food and the
consequences of eating or drinking
something.
Warm-up
Have a quick class discussion about stories. What
makes a good story? What are students’ favourite
stories from childhood? Do they still like reading
or listening to stories? Ask students if they know
what a saga is (= a long story about past events,
usually over a long period of time).
4
Reading and grammar
1 To introduce the topic and elicit predictions,
write mini-saga on the board and invite
students to guess what it means. They read the
description and check if their predictions were
correct. Elicit the three rules orally.
THINK Students answer the questions in
pairs using modal verbs of deduction. Get
feedback and correct any grammar mistakes.
Suggested answers
A He can’t have felt terrible because of
the tea. He must have eaten too much.
B Monica must be his girlfriend. He
might have told his wife he was having
an affair. He could have told her he
wanted to leave her. I think he hopes to
get a divorce. I don’t think he’s going to
be able to do it, because she’s poisoned
him.
C Auntie Ivy’s advice might be wrong. It
might have been Marge’s birthday, or
Marge could be pregnant. Marge’s idea
might be bad. It might be a good idea if
she goes on a diet.
Answers
1 It must have exactly 50 words.
2 The title is not included in the word
count – it can be up to 15 words.
3 It must tell a story.
2 Students fill in the gaps using the first
conditional. Get feedback and correct the
grammar if needed. Note that items 3 and
4 say basically the same thing, but draw
students’ attention to the use of unless. Won’t
qualify and won’t be allowed are synonyms, so
allow both as correct where there’s an option.
Answers
1 If it doesn’t have exactly 50 words, it
won’t qualify.
2 If there are more than 15 words in
the title, it won’t be allowed.
3 Unless it tells a story, it won’t qualify.
4 If it tells a story, it will be allowed. /
If it doesn’t tell a story, it won’t be
allowed.
pp59–60
Extra idea: Ask students to write an
ending for story B. You could give them
free rein, or impose a further word
restriction.
5
FINISH IT Students finish the sentences in a
personalised way, then share with a partner.
Units 5&6 Review
133
Writing
6 Remind students of the mini-saga rules and
elicit which one story B broke (rule 1). They
then rewrite the story with the correct word
count. Remind them that they need to keep
the essence of the story, just reduce the
number of words. When they’ve finished, they
share with a partner and read each other’s
work. Encourage peer correction.
Suggested answer
‘Did you enjoy the tea?,’ she asked, taking
the empty mug from her husband.
‘Delicious,’ he replied. ‘I had to tell you
about Monica. Thanks for understanding.’
‘No problem.’ She smiled. ‘If you’re happy,
that’s fine.’ She held the mug under the
tap, washing away all traces of the poison.
Tip: This task practises précis, which is
challenging even for native speakers.
However, it really gets students thinking
about how things can be rephrased and
which words are redundant, so it’s worth
persevering, even if you have to give
them a lot of support and suggestions.
7 Students write their own mini-saga about
food and health. Break the activity up into
stages. Firstly, they write notes and ideas.
Secondly, they think about what grammar and
vocabulary they could include. Thirdly, they
write their story, using their notes and ideas.
Finally, they read their work, count the number
of words and correct any mistakes they see.
Extra idea: Display their mini-sagas around
the classroom for everyone to read and
vote on the class favourite.
EXPLORE ONLINE
This activity can be done as homework. Students
could find interesting and enjoyable mini-sagas
and bring them into class. They then create their
own comprehension questions for the mini-sagas.
134
Units 5&6 Review
Tip: It’s nice to let students find things they
would like to use in class. It’s more
learner-centred, it practises skills work, it
provides authentic language and it saves
you time, too! Make sure you check and
edit as needed, though, so the language
is level-appropriate and understandable.
Preposition park
a Students complete the text with the missing
prepositions, then compare their answers in
pairs.
MA With a weaker class, add a preposition
word bank on the board.
Answers
1 about 2 for 3 by 4 as 5 of 6 to
7 against* 8 of 9 of 10 from / against
11 In 12 of
* It’s also acceptable to have no preposition
here, so don’t penalise students who can’t think
of one.
b Students read again and guess which
superfood the text describes. Which words
gave the best clues?
Answers
Garlic (allicin, vegetable, vampires)
Aspects of culture
a
GUESS Set a time limit so students don’t get
stuck on unknown vocabulary – they probably
don’t need it to do the activity. They compare
their answers in pairs and explain their choices
and clues they found in the text.
A Morocco (Berber people are from Morocco.
Souk is an Arabic work for ‘market’.)
B Mexico (Aztecs and Maya are from Mexico
(and countries such as Belize, Guatemala
and Honduras).)
C Australia (Aboriginals are the indigenous
people of Australia. The tea tree is an
Australian tree.)
D Brazil (The Amazon basin is situated in
Brazil.)
E Turkey (Sultans lived in Turkey (the Ottoman
Empire), and Manisa is in Turkey.)
b Students match the descriptions to the photos.
Answers
A Top photo, left-hand column (saffron)
B Top photo, right-hand column
(chicalote)
C Bottom photo, right-hand column (tea
tree)
D Bottom photo, left-hand column
(guaraná powder)
E is not pictured.
c
This could also be done as a quiz in pairs.
Students take turns asking and answering the
questions.
Answers
a) tea tree oil b) chicalote
c guaraná powder d) Berber remedies
e) guaraná powder f) mesir paste
g) Berber remedies, guaraná powder
d Students discuss the best natural remedies
in their country. Get feedback and ask more
questions (eg Do they really work? Do they just
give a placebo effect?).
Extra idea: Students could use the
information they discuss as the basis of a
mini-talk about a natural remedy that they
would recommend.
Units 5&6 Review
135
Tasks
General teacher’s notes
Specific task notes
1 You can either read the task instructions to
students, or photocopy the task notes and give
them to students.
Unit 1
stage
2 For some tasks, students can produce a printed
document if they have access to computers.
Decide if you want them to do this and
organise the task accordingly.
1: Students can do some research online
or they can refer back to the lists they
wrote in Unit 1 (Lesson 2, Exercise 10).
stage
3 If the task requires certain things, eg the
facility to make an audio recording, ensure that
students have access to these.
3: Elicit suggestions, eg Water is life!, Don’t
waste a drop. Leaflet formats could
range from a simple one-sided A4 sheet
to a more complex folded format.
stage
4: Encourage students to illustrate their
leaflets, either by drawing pictures
themselves or finding them online. If
they have computer access, they can
experiment with typography and layout
for maximum impact.
4 Make sure students understand each stage of
the task. As you go through the stages, check
students understand the example language
and elicit more where necessary. Remember
that when students are in their pairs or
groups, they’ll need language for suggestions,
agreement, etc. Where there are dialogues or
conversations, it’s often a good idea to model
them first with confident students.
5 Tell students that when they need new
language, they can use a dictionary, or ask
each other or you for help.
Unit 2
stage
1: If necessary, review language for giving
suggestions.
stage
2: Students will probably choose to focus
on the key event that they identified in
stage 1, but they can select any scene.
Encourage them to choose something
with conflict or a surprise to create
maximum impact when they perform
it. Remind them not to have more
characters in the scene than there are
students in the group, or they won’t be
able to act it out.
stage
4: Students should try to do this without
a script, putting as much emotion into
their performance as possible. However,
less-confident students should be
allowed to use prompts.
6 As students do the task, monitor them and
help them with language. Check their written
work so they have a correct final version.
7 You can do the unit task as revision after you
have finished the unit, or at any other point
during the unit that you feel is appropriate.
8 Students will need a certain amount of help to
do the tasks, but at the same time encourage
them to be as independent as possible, as this
promotes learner autonomy.
stage
136
Tasks
5: Remind students to vote on content, not
acting ability!
Jetstream Intermediate Teacher’s Guide © Helbling Languages PHOTOCOPIABLE
Unit 3
stage
1: Weaker students could look back at page
25 of the Student’s Book.
stage
3: You may need to help with specialist
vocabulary here, eg strings, mouthpiece,
fingerboard, bow. If you prefer, encourage
students to paraphrase using relative
clauses (eg the bit that you blow into,
the pieces that stick out the top).
Unit 4
stage
1: Give a time limit for students to choose
their work of art.
stage
3: Ensure that pairs split the presentation
equally between them. Allow them to
use visuals if they want (at the very least
they should have an image of the work
they’re presenting).
Unit 5
stage
1: Write a list on the board of useful
phrases, eg I find ... stressful, ... stresses
me out, ... makes me really stressed.
Elicit that verbs should be in the -ing
form (eg losing your job, going to the
dentist, flying).
stage
3: Elicit suggestions, eg Some situations
can be really stressful. Here are the ten
situations that would stress us the most.
4: If you want, add a final stage, where the
class has to agree on the top ten situations.
stage
Unit 6
stage
1: Allow students to choose a different
topic if they prefer. It’s quite easy to find
ideas by typing ‘Fascinating facts
about ...’ into a search engine.
stage
3: Ensure that students jumble the answers
so the correct answer isn’t always A.
stage
4: You could end with a feedback session
to find the most fascinating fact.
Jetstream Intermediate Teacher’s Guide © Helbling Languages PHOTOCOPIABLE
Tasks
137
Unit 1
stage
1
TASK: Design a leaflet to promote ways of saving water.
Work in pairs. Write a list of different
ways of saving water.
•
•
stage
2
3
Think of a catchy slogan to go at the top
of the leaflet and decide what format it’s
going to be.
stage
4
Write and design the leaflet.
stage
5
Have a class display of all the leaflets and
discuss which water-saving tips are most
useful.
Have a shower instead of a bath.
Don’t use a hosepipe to water the
garden.
•
stage
…
Work with another pair and compare
your lists. Then agree on four pieces of
advice to include in your leaflet and find
some facts and figures to back up your
advice.
•
‘
‘
I think [having a shower instead of a bath] is the
best way of saving water.
If people [had showers instead of baths], that would
save a lot of water.
Did you know that the average five-
’
’
minute shower uses about 35 litres of
water, whereas a bath uses up to 80
litres?

Unit 2
stage
1
TASK: Draft the opening episode of a new soap opera.
Work in groups of four or five and think
about the following questions:
• Where is your soap opera going to be
set?
‘
‘
’
I think we should set it on a distant planet.
How about setting it in a wealthy part of
Hollywood?
’
stage
2
Choose a scene from the episode and
write the conversation that takes place
between two or more of the characters.
stage
3
Allocate roles and rehearse the scene. If
you’re not acting, be the director!
stage
4
Perform your scene for the other groups
and answer any questions they may
have.
stage
5
Vote on the most interesting new soap
opera.
• When is it going to be set?
•
•
would be good to set it in the future.
‘ItI think
’
it would be more interesting to set it in
‘ present day.
the
’
What characters are going to be in it?
should have a couple who are in love.
‘We
’
We definitely need a bad guy!
’
‘
What key event is going to happen in
the first episode?
‘
‘
The couple are going to get married, but the
bad guy wants to stop them.
They’ve just discovered that the planet is going
to be destroyed!
138
Tasks
’
’
Jetstream Intermediate Teacher’s Guide © Helbling Languages PHOTOCOPIABLE
Unit 3
TASK: Write a description of how to make a musical instrument.
stage
1
Work in groups of three or four. Make
a list of as many musical instruments as
you can.
stage
2
Choose an instrument from your list that
you think you could make out of rubbish
or recycled material.
stage
3
Write a paragraph describing how
to make your instrument – but don’t
mention the name of it.
stage
4
Display all the paragraphs around
the classroom. Try and guess what
instrument each one describes.
I think this one is a tuba.
‘This
’
one might be a guitar, but I’m not sure.
‘
’
First, you take a large cardboard box and
make a hole in it.
Then, you get ...

Unit 4
stage
1
TASK: Give a presentation of a work of art.
Work in pairs. Decide on a work of art
that you both like. It can be:
• when it was created
• a painting
• why it was created
1904 (first bronze casting)
• a photograph
Originally par t of a doorway surround,
begun in 1880, called ‘The Gates of Hell’
• a sculpture
• how big it is
• an installation
About 186 centimetres tall
• a statue
• where it is
• a piece of graffiti.
stage
2
About 28 versions around the world
Find out as much as you can about your
chosen work and make notes. You could
include:
• what it’s called
‘The Thinker’ (‘Le Penseur’ in French)
(museums and public places)
• how much it’s worth.
Sold for over $15 million in 2013
stage
• who created it
3
Prepare a presentation on your chosen
work. You should include your opinion(s)
of it and why you chose it.
Auguste Rodin, French sculptor
(1840–1917)
Jetstream Intermediate Teacher’s Guide © Helbling Languages PHOTOCOPIABLE
Tasks
139
Unit 5
stage
stage
1
2
TASK: Make a list of the top ten most stressful situations.
Work in pairs. Discuss situations that are
stressful and make a list.
exams are really stressful.
‘IOrthink
’
losing your job – that would really stress me
‘out.
’
They say that moving house is one of the most
‘ things you can do.
stressful
’
I don’t like getting ready to go on holiday – I
‘find that stressful because I’m worried I’ll forget
something!
’
Work with two more pairs and compare
notes. Then agree on your top ten
stressful situations and make a list of
them. Choose a title for your list.
stage
3
Write one or two short sentences to
introduce your list.
stage
4
Work with the whole class. Someone
from each group reads out their group’s
introduction and list of situations. Have
a class discussion about which situations
are most stressful.
stage
5
think that [...] is the most stressful.
‘II definitely
’
find [...] is more stressful than [...], but I can see
‘why other people think it’s stressful.
’
Choose two or three of the most
stressful situations and suggest three
ways of making each one less stressful.
should ...
‘You
’
You could try ...
’
‘

Unit 6
stage
1
TASK: Write a quiz about fascinating facts.
Work in pairs and choose a topic area
from this list:
stage
3
• animals
• the human body
• technology
Answer A: 60%
• natural phenomena
stage
2
Work with another pair and exchange
your lists of questions. For each of the
other pair’s questions, add two wrong
answers to make a multiple-choice
question.
Do some research to find five fascinating
facts about your chosen topic. For each
fact, write a question and the correct
answer.
Fact: About 80% of the human brain is
Answer B: 70%
Answer C: 80%
stage
4
Give your combined list of ten questions
and multiple-choice answers to another
group. Do the quiz you’re given!
water.
Question: How much of the human brain is
water?
Answer: 80%
140
Tasks
Jetstream Intermediate Teacher’s Guide © Helbling Languages PHOTOCOPIABLE
Technique banks
Using the video
You will not necessarily want to work through
all three stages described here every time, nor
will you always want to work through all the
sub-stages. It depends how fast you and your
class want to go and how much practice they
need. But if your goal is for students to act out a
conversation, then – especially in the early days
– you will need to build up their confidence (and
take away their support) gradually rather than
suddenly.
This structure of gently developing a conversation
from reception to production is ideal for exploiting
many of the conversations in Everyday English but
it will also work well with other conversations in
the book.
Stage 1
Watch, listen to and / or read the conversation.
• Students watch or listen to* and / or
(silently) read the conversation once or
twice. Make sure they understand any new
words or expressions.
• They listen to and repeat sentences from the
conversation, either after you or the audio /
video.
• You read one part of the conversation,
students read the other in chorus. Swap
roles.
• Divide the class in half, each with one role.
Open pairs: two students read the conversation
while the rest of the class listen.
Closed pairs: students read the conversation in
pairs.
*Different ways of using video / audio
• Play the video sequence with sound and
vision (S+V) in the normal way. You can do
this with or without the subtitles.
• Play the video sequence with vision only
(VO) – and ask students to imagine what is
being said. Then play the sequence S+V so
they can check.
• Play the video sequence with sound only
(SO) (or just play the audio) – and ask
students to guess:
o how many characters there are
o where they are
o what they look like
o what the situation is.
Then play the sequence S+V so they can
check, or look at the photo if you’re using
audio.
• Play part of the video / audio sequence
(S+V / VO / SO) and pause it. Ask students
to guess:
o what X is going to say next
o what is going to happen next.
Play the next part for students to see if they
were right.
Note: Any time you play the video S+V, you can
do so with or without the subtitles and you can
vary the order you do this, ie first without, then
with, or first with, then without. It’s very flexible!
Stage 2
Practise using the ‘Look, look up and speak’
technique.
This is a great technique to help students
move from listening / reading to acting out a
conversation.
Working in pairs, students ‘read’ the conversation
in the following way.
• A looks at their line, then looks up at B,
makes eye contact and says it.
• B then looks at their line, looks up at A,
makes eye contact and says it.
And the conversation continues in this way. It
takes a little longer than just reading it, but it helps
to gently take students away from the support of
the written word and build up their confidence.
You will need to demonstrate this technique with
a student in front of the whole class the first few
times you use it.
Technique banks
141
Stage 3
Act it out.
When you and your students feel they are ready,
students can close their books and have a go on
their own. They can do this first sitting down,
then standing up and adding gestures. It doesn’t
matter if the words aren’t exactly the same as in
the video. At this stage, fluency is more important
than accuracy. (If students are making a lot of
mistakes, go through stages 1 and 2 again.)
If some students are happy to come to the front
and ‘perform’ in front of the class, that’s great. If
not, don’t pressurise them. Let them ‘perform’ in
small groups.
Variations
1 Suggest students take on different moods or
ways of behaving: quiet and shy / noisy and
enthusiastic / happy / grumpy / angry /
confused / tired, etc.
2 Bring props into the classroom if appropriate
(and you can get hold of some).
Using memory games
Use it or lose it! That’s what fitness instructors say
about our muscles. And it’s what psychologists say
about our memory too. If we want to be good at
remembering things, then we need to practise as
often as possible. The more we practise, the better
we get. And as remembering is a very large part
of successful language learning, it’s crucial that
we give our students plenty of opportunities to
exercise their memory.
Some memory games are already indicated in the
lessons, wherever you see this symbol: .
Here are some more, very simple, ideas if you
would like to do more. You can do them as
whole-class activities or, once they are familiar to
students, do them in pairs or small groups. They
need only take a few minutes, so make them a
regular part of your routine if you can.
Using pictures
1 Ask students to look at a picture in the book for
30 seconds then close their books.
2 Ask them questions about the picture.
Obviously what you ask will be dependent on
the picture but here are some possibilities:
Is there a …? Are there any …s? How many
…s are there?
Where is X? What is in / on / under / behind
the …? What is on the left / right?
What colour is X? What is Y wearing?
Variations
1 Students write a list of people or objects in the
picture.
2 Students do a sketch of the picture. (We use
the word sketch rather than drawing because
it’s somehow less stressful. Some people find
the word drawing a bit scary!)
142
Technique banks
3 Students test each other in pairs. One has their
book open, the other has their book shut.
Using texts
1 Students re-read a text they’ve already worked
on in class, perhaps a while ago, then close
their books.
2 Ask them questions on the text or make true /
false statements for them to confirm or correct.
Variations
Can they remember the following?
• the title
• the very first word in the text
• the last word
• the first line
• the last line
• the most frequent word
• any words that occur more than once
Using conversations
1 Students re-read a conversation or listen to it
again, then close their books.
2 Say a line from the conversation. Students reply
with the line that comes next.
Variations
1 Read the conversation saying just the first part
of each line. Students complete the lines.
2 Choose lines from a conversation and ask
students who says them.
Using vocabulary
Ask questions, eg Can you remember ten words
from the last lesson?
How many words can you remember beginning
with …?
How many places / countries / adjectives / irregular
verbs, etc can you remember?
A couple of other activities
Repeat my sentence
This is an exercise in very careful listening as well
as remembering. Students work in pairs. Student
A says a sentence (or reads one from a text or
conversation). Student B must repeat it word for
word. They swap. They should do this five or six
times, with the sentences getting a little longer
every time.
I, I, I, you, you, you!
Another exercise in careful listening as well as
remembering. Students work in pairs. Student A
makes statements about themselves beginning
with ‘I’. Student B listens carefully. After five or
six statements, Student B must repeat as many
of Student A’s statements as they can remember,
beginning with ‘you’. Then they swap over.
This exercise can have a grammatical focus and
function as a very personal repetition drill and it
lends itself to many different structures. Some
possible kinds of statements:
I like + noun
I like + activity
Every day I + present simple
Last year I + past simple
I’ve never + present perfect
In the future I’d like to …
Note: According to memory experts, we readily
forget 70% of what we learn in 24 hours unless
we recycle it before that 24-hour period is up. You
can facilitate that as a teacher by doing two things
(which you may already be doing!):
1 Make sure you leave five minutes at the
end of a lesson for students to recap what
they’ve learnt in the lesson.
2 Tell students just to take five or ten minutes
to go through the lesson at home that
evening … and tell them why it’s important
to do that.
You have control over the first one but not the
second! Because of that, revising the previous
lesson at the beginning of the next one is also
crucial
Working with mixed-ability classes
It’s inevitable that there will be students with
different levels of English (though not necessarily
ability) in your class, especially in larger classes.
Some students will need extra support, some will
need less. So here are some ideas to help you
tackle this issue. You will also find ideas in the unitby-unit notes, where you see this symbol: MA.
Note: We’ve used the terms ‘stronger’ and
‘weaker’ for the sake of convenience but of course
those terms are not completely accurate.
• Use stronger students to correct weaker
students. Make sure that you praise weaker
students for their successes just as much as
stronger ones.
• Direct more difficult questions at stronger
students and easier ones at weaker students.
• Sometimes pair and group students of the same
ability so they feel comfortable with each other.
• And sometimes pair up students of different
levels and encourage the stronger student to
help the weaker one.
• Group weaker students together for an activity
and give them extra attention, leaving stronger
students to work alone.
• Use stronger students as group leaders and
give them more responsibility for activities, like
being the group ‘scribe’ and keeping a written
record, for example.
• When appropriate, give weaker students
slightly easier tasks. The teacher’s notes may
suggest these – look for the MA icon.
• Note weaker students’ errors and give them
extra homework.
Fast finishers
If some students complete an activity more quickly
than others, have some extra activities ready that
they can do. Ideally, these activities should be
short, fun things that are easy to set up. Students
shouldn’t feel punished for finishing quickly by
being given something boring to do!
• Also suitable are the Memory games using
pictures on page 142, once students have
played them in class and know how they work.
• Online research is another task you can give,
using the Explore suggestions, for example.
• And finally, you can offer them lots of different
e-zone activities to choose from.
Technique banks
143
HELBLING LANGUAGES
www.helblinglanguages.com
JETSTREAM Intermediate Teacher’s Guide A
by Terry Prosser
with Jane Revell and Jeremy Harmer
© HELBLING LANGUAGES 2016
First published 2016
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without the prior written permission of the publishers.
ISBN 978-3-99045-019-2
The publishers would like to thank the following for their kind permission to reproduce the following photographs and other copyright material:
The publisher would like to thank the following for their kind permission to reproduce the following photographs:
Nikolay Petkov p11 (bees), Nevinates p15 (turmeric; fresh ginger), Paul George Bodea p15 (ananas), Ia64 p16 (toothpaste) / Dreamstime.com; ©iStock.com/tunart p10
(tiger), Eraxion pp11-12 (sun), somchaisom p11 (full moon), Lauri Patterson p13, inhauscreative p14 (pie), Antonprado p15 (honey), carlosdelacalle p15 (miso paste), bhofack2
p15 (coconuts), cjp p15 (artichoke), FotografiaBasica p15 (nuts), nata_vkusidey p15 (kiwis), Anna Kucherova p16 (cherries), kone p16 (vinegar), Windujedi p16 (sugar), Leszek
Kobusinski p16 (chocolate), matka_Wariatka p16 (peanut), Missing35mm p17 (SPA hotel), CreativaImages p17 (Thalassotherapy), StephanieFrey p18 (pancake); ROADSIDE
/ GOLDWYN / THE KOBAL COLLECTION p14 (Supersize Me); cover image of Does Anything Eat Wasps Profile Books p10; AlessandroZocc p10 (penguin), pietrowsky p10
(fingerprints), Kolopach p12 (honey), Creativeye99 p15 (garlic), Africa Studio p17 (reception), Africa Studio p18 (washing up), MmeEmil p18 (ice cream), george tsartsianidis
p19 (saffron flower), africa924 p19 (guarana), yands p19 (poppy), Anna Kurzaeva p19 (garlic), LazingBee p19 (tea tree) /Shutterstock.com.
Illustrated by Doriano Strologo
Edited by Catriona Watson-Brown
Designed by Pixarte
Cover by Capolinea
Printed by Athesia
Every effort has been made to trace the owners of any copyright material in this book. If notified, the publisher will be pleased to rectify any errors or
omissions.
Descargar